Yamaha RX-V1800 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V1800

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V1800

Printed in Malaysia WK69330

RX-V1800

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

RX-V1800_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 6:13 PM

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press

MASTER ON/OFF to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the

main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC

power plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

................................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the

plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and

an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by

MASTER ON/OFF. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

Note

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying

the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be

connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or

coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

This symbol mark is according to the

EU directive 2002/96/EC.

This symbol mark means that electrical

and electronic equipment, at their end-

of-life, should be disposed of separately

from your household waste.

Please act according to your local rules

and do not dispose of your old products

with your normal household waste.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Notice ....................................................................... 2

Features ................................................................... 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 4

Getting started ........................................................ 5

Quick start guide .................................................... 6

Connections........................................................... 12

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening

room ................................................................... 37

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 37

Playback ................................................................ 42

Basic procedure ....................................................... 42

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 43

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 43

Using your headphones............................................ 43

Muting the audio output........................................... 44

Displaying the input source information

(SIGNAL INFO) ................................................. 44

Playing video sources

in the background of an audio source.................. 45

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 45

Sound field programs ........................................... 46

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 46

Sound field program descriptions............................ 46

Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 51

Using audio features ............................................. 52

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 52

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 52

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 53

Enjoying multi-channel sources

in 2-channel stereo............................................... 53

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 54

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 54

Manual tuning.......................................................... 54

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 55

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 55

Selecting preset stations........................................... 56

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 57

Radio Data System tuning

(Europe model only)......................................... 58

Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 58

Selecting the Radio Data System program type

(PTY SEEK mode).............................................. 59

Using the enhanced other networks

(EON) data service .............................................. 60

Using iPod™.......................................................... 61

Controlling iPod™................................................... 61

Recording .............................................................. 63

Advanced sound configurations...........................64

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 64

Selecting decoders ................................................... 69

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........72

Using SET MENU................................................... 76

1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 77

2 VOLUME MENU ................................................ 81

3 SOUND MENU.................................................... 82

4 INPUT MENU...................................................... 85

5 OPTION MENU................................................... 88

Saving and recalling the system settings

(SYSTEM MEMORY)......................................93

Saving the current system settings........................... 93

Loading the stored system settings.......................... 94

Using examples........................................................ 95

Remote control features........................................97

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 97

Setting remote control codes ................................... 99

Programming codes from other remote controls ... 101

Changing source names in the display window..... 102

Macro programming features ................................ 103

Clearing configurations ......................................... 106

Using multi-zone configuration..........................108

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 108

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 109

Advanced setup....................................................113

Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 113

Troubleshooting...................................................117

Resetting the system............................................124

Glossary................................................................125

Sound field program information......................129

Parametric equalizer information .....................130

Specifications .......................................................131

Index.....................................................................133

(at the end of this manual)

Front Panel ...............................................................i

Remote Control ...................................................... ii

Sound output in each sound field program......... iii

List of remote control codes ...................................v

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

“

MASTER ON/OFF” or “

DVD” (example) indicates

the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.

Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this

manual for the information about each position of the parts.

NOTICE

2 En

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535

& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo, and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

Notice

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

•“

MASTER ON/OFF” or “

DVD” (example)

indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the

remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at

the end of this manual for the information about each

position of the parts.

• The symbol “☞” with page number(s) indicates the

corresponding reference page(s).

• The shape of the illustration (for example, speaker

terminals, input/output jacks, AC outlets, etc.) in this

manual may vary depending on the model.

iPod

FEATURES

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 130 W + 130 W

Center: 130 W

Surround: 130 W + 130 W

Surround back: 130 W + 130 W

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality multi-channel source playback

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Digital audio decoders

◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx

decoder

◆ DTS NEO:6 decoder

Sophisticated FM/AM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio

based on HDMI version 1.3a

◆ Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

information capability

◆ Deep Color video signal (30/36 bits) transmission capability

◆ High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability

◆ High definition digital audio format signals capability

◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI

digital video) capability for monitor out

◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or

480p/576p to 720p, 1080i or 1080p

iPod™ controlling capability

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod

(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

Other features

◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-

channel input

◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from

480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability includes

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and

macro capability

◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility

◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS

◆ SYSTEM MEMORY capability for saving and recalling

multiple system parameter settings

◆ Sleep timer

Features

4 En

Check that you received all of the following accessories.

The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.

Supplied accessories

Note

Remote control

Batteries (6)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

(except Europe model)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphoneSpeaker terminal wrench Power cables

(Two for Asia model)

Indoor FM antenna

TUNER

CD-R

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD

PHONO

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR

POWER

STANDBY

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

MUTE

Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control

(except Europe model)

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

(Europe model)

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

(Europe model)

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START

STRAIGHT

A/B/C/D/E

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

ENHANCERSTEREO

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

GETTING STARTED

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control (Except Europe model)

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings

(+ and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the transmit indicator (

) does not flash or its light becomes

dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

Getting started

Notes

Caution

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE

plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may

cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire

hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight

slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

QUICK START GUIDE

6 En

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.

In these steps, you need the following supplied

accessories.

❏ AM loop antenna

❏ Indoor FM antenna

❏ Power cable

The following items are not included in the package of this

unit.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2

❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1

❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 4

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. One center speaker

3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 7

❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor.......................................... x 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2

Select RCA composite video cables.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround back

right speaker

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround back left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center

speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞ P. 7

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Turn on the power and

start playback

☞ P. 8

☞ P. 10

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers and center speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and

the input jack of the subwoofer.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVD

DVR

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD

DTV/

CBL

MD/

TAPE

DVD CD-R

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

TAPE

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

DTV/CBL

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

DTV/

CBL

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+ + +

+ +

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Speaker terminals

12 3 4

To the front left

speaker

To the front right

speaker

Loosen Insert Tighten

To the center

speaker

Speaker terminal wrench

To the surround

back right

speaker

To the surround

back left

speaker

To the surround

right speaker

To the surround

left speaker

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Subwoofer cable

Quick start guide

8 En

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack of this unit.

• When you connect a component that has only a SCART

jack, use an appropriate converter. The connection

between a converter and this unit depends on signals that

are available on the converter. For details, refer to the

instructions of your converter.

• This unit cannot transmit RGB signals.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and the

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video

input jack of your video monitor.

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

Ω

UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVD

DVR

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD

DTV/

CBL

MD/

TAPE

DVD CD-R

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

TAPE

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

DTV/CBL

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

DTV/

CBL

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+ + +

+ +

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC

wall outlets.

VIDEO MONITOR OUTDVD VIDEO

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Composite video

output jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Video monitor

AV receiver

Video cable

VIDEO MONITOR

OUT jack

Video input jack

Quick start guide

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and

indoor FM antenna to this unit.

The types of the supplied indoor FM antenna and the FM

antenna terminal of this unit are different depending on the

models.

Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity

and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND

terminal.

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

5 Connect the supplied power cable to this unit

and then plug the power cable and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

• This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) that provide(s)

power to other components (except Korea model). See

page 32 for details.

• (Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables

suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location

before plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet.

Note

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Press and hold

the tab

Insert Release the tab

For further connections

• Using other kinds of speaker combinations ☞ P. 14

• Connecting a video monitor via various ways of

connection ☞ P. 24

• Connecting a DVD player via various ways of

connection ☞ P. 25

• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video

recorder ☞ P. 27

• Connecting a set-top box ☞ P. 27

• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, or a

turntable ☞ P. 28

• Connecting an external amplifier ☞ P. 29

• Connecting a DVD player via multi-channel analog

audio connection ☞ P. 30

• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock ☞ P. 31

• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 31

• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel

☞ P. 31

• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 32

General connection information

• General information on jacks and cable plugs

☞ P. 20

• General information on HDMI ☞ P. 21–22

• Speaker impedance setting ☞ P. 33

Quick start guide

10 En

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position on the front panel.

3 Rotate the

INPUT selector to set the input

source to “DVD”.

• The recommended sound field program is set for each

input source (DVD, etc.). You can also use various sound

field programs and other sound modes for playback. Refer

to the following pages for details:

– see pages 46 to 50 to use various sound field programs

– see page 51 to turn on or off the sound effect

– see page 52 to use the Pure Direct mode for high

fidelity sound

• You can also set the input source to “TUNER” to use the

FM/AM tuning feature. For information on the FM/AM

tuning, see pages 54 to 57.

4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

5 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

■ After using this unit...

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to

the standby mode.

This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small

amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from

the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby

mode, press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel

(or

POWER on the remote control). See page 33 for

details.

Step 3: Turn on the power and start

playback

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see

page 33). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front

speakers (see page 113).

Quick start guide

11 En

INTRODUCTION

English

What do you want to do with this unit?

Using various input sources

• Basic operations of this unit ☞ P. 42

• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 54

• Enjoying Radio Data System programs ☞ P. 58

• Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 61

Using various sound features

• Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 46

• Using the Pure Direct mode for high fidelity sound

☞ P. 52

• Adjusting the tonal quality of the speakers ☞ P. 52

• Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 64

Adjusting the parameters of this unit

• Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for

your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 37

• Setting the remote control ☞ P. 97

Additional features

• Displaying the current input source signal

information in the OSD ☞ P. 44

• Saving and recalling the system settings of this unit

(SYSTEM MEMORY) ☞ P. 93

• Using headphones ☞ P. 43

• Using this unit in multiple rooms simultaneously

(multi-zone configuration) ☞ P. 108

• Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 45

Manually adjusting various parameters

of this unit

• Setting the basic speaker configuration ☞ P. 77

• Adjusting the balance of the speaker levels ☞ P. 79

• Setting the distance of each speaker ☞ P. 80

• Setting the parameters related to the volume level

☞ P. 81

• Adjusting the tonal quality by using the graphic

equalizer ☞ P. 82

• Adjusting the lip sync function for the HDMI

connection ☞ P. 84

• Assigning the input/output jacks of this unit

☞ P. 86

• Setting the parameters of the front panel display or

OSD ☞ P. 88

• Setting the parameter related to the video signals

☞ P. 89

• Protecting the various settings ☞ P. 90

• Setting the parameters of the multi-zone feature

☞ P. 91

Adjusting the advanced parameters

• Setting the speaker impedance of the connected

speakers ☞ P. 113

• Setting the parameters of this unit to default values

☞ P. 116

12 En

0 TRIGGER OUT jacks

These are control expansion terminals for custom installation.

A RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult

your dealer for details.

Connections

Rear panel

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVR

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD

DTV/

CBL

MD/

TAP E

DVD CD-R

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

TAP E

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

DTV/CBL

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DTV/CBL

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

DTV/

CBL

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+ + +

+ +

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

2 314567

A98B

Name Page

1 HDMI jacks 21

2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 24 – 27

3 Audio component jacks 28

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 31, 108

4 Video component jacks 24 – 27

5 ANTENNA terminals 32

6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

7 AC IN 32

AC OUTLET(S) 32

8 DOCK terminal 31

9 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks 25

B MULTI CH INPUT jacks 30

PRE OUT jacks 29

ZONE OUT jacks 108

Speaker terminals 16

WRENCH HOLDER 18

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

■ 7.1-channel speaker layout

7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended to play back the sound of high definition digital audio formats (Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 16

for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 46 for

details.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the

ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a

center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.

Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity

sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources. The position of

the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer

near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Placing speakers

SBR

SBL

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

30 cm (12 in) or more

14 En

Connections

■ 6.1-channel speaker layout

See page 17 for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the

effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See

page 15 for details.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

Center speaker (C)

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

Subwoofer (SW)

The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as

those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13).

Surround back speaker (SB)

Connect a single surround speaker to the SURROUND

BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals and place the single

surround back speaker behind the listening position. The

surround back left and right channel signals are mixed

down and output at the single surround back speaker when

you set “SUR.B L/R SP” to “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see

page 78).

■ 5.1-channel speaker layout

See page 17 for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the

effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See

page 15 for details.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

Center speaker (C)

Subwoofer (SW)

The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as

those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13).

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND

speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers

behind the listening position.

For the smooth and unbroken sound field behind the

listening position, place the surround left and right

speakers farther back compared with the placement in the

7.1-channel speaker layout.

The surround back channel signals are directed to the

surround left and right speakers when “SUR.B L/R SP” is

set to “NONE” (see page 78).

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

For other speaker combinations

You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel

speaker combinations.

Use the automatic setup feature (see page 37) or set the “SPEAKER SET” parameters in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 72) to

output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field

programs (see page 46). We recommend that you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound field

programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set “PRESENCE SP” to

“YES” (see page 78).

You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit

automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field

programs. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 79).

Note

PRPL

1.8 m (6 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m (6 ft)

16 En

Connections

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the

plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

• You can use the SP1 terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 108).

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit

automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field

programs. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 79).

■ For the 7.1-channel speaker setting

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 33).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see

page 33). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (see page 113).

Notes

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

+ + +

+ +

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Presence speakers

Subwoofer

Right

Left

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

Right

Left

Right

Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers

(see page 108)

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ For the 6.1-channel speaker setting

■ For the 5.1-channel speaker setting

Surround back speaker

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

+ + +

+ +

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Presence speakers

(see pages 15 and 16)

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Left

Right

Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers

(see page 108)

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

+ + +

+ +

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Left

Right

Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers

(see page 108)

Front speakers for the

bi-amplification

connections

(see page 19)

Presence speakers

(see pages 15 and 16)

18 En

Connections

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the

supplied speaker terminal wrench.

5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto

WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this

unit when not in use.

■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker

terminals

Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see

page 108).

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the

terminal.

3 Close the tab to secure the wire.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Speaker terminal wrench

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting the banana plug

(Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea

models)

1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

2 Insert the banana plug connector into the

end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals.

Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the

terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug.

■ Using bi-amplification connections

This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections

to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-

amplification connection.

To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT

and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP speaker terminals as

shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections,

set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see

page 116).

When you make the conventional connection with the speakers,

make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the

speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the

speakers for details.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

Banana plug

Caution

Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to

separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)

crossovers.

Note

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND

+ +

This unit

LeftRight

Front speakers

20 En

Connections

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connect the video

input jacks of this unit to the video output jacks of the

input source components to switch the audio and video

sources simultaneously. Connection depends on the

availability of input jacks on your video monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See

pages 23 and 89 for details.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Note

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Audio jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange)

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Video jacks and cable plugs

(Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

This unit has four HDMI input jacks and one HDMI output jack for digital audio and video signal input/output. Connect

the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3, or HDMI IN 4 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI

components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI input jack of other HDMI

components (such as a TV and a projector).

The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of the selected input source are output at the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit.

You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 44).

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI

cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo

printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• The HDMI OUT jack outputs the audio signals input at the

HDMI input jacks only even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to

“OTHER” (see page 85).

• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the

HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to

establish the connection to the component.

• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video

and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be

output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”

in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 89) to activate this feature.

■ Default input assignment of HDMI input

jacks

Information on HDMI™

This HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standards:

• HDMI Version 1.3a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.3a) licensed by HDMI

Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

Note

Notes

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

HDMI input jack Assigned input source

IN1 BD/HD DVD

IN2 DVD

IN3 DTV/CBL

IN4 DVR

22 En

Connections

■ HDMI signal compatibility with this unit

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio

signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio

sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the

following connections:

– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 30)

– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source

component, and set the component appropriately.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input

source component appropriately so that the component outputs

the audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the

bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied

instruction manuals for details.

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features

(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via the

Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play

back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD

contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the

following resolutions:

Video signal format

– 480i/576i

– 480p/576p

– 720p

– 1080i

– 1080p

Refresh rate

– 59.94(60)/50 Hz

This unit also accepts 30 or 36-bit Deep Color video

signals.

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

media

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch,

2.8224 MHz,1 bit

SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High

definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master

Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution

Audio

Blu-ray Disc,

HD DVD, etc.

Notes

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio signal flow

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals input at one of the HDMI input jacks can be output

at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set

to “OTHER” (see page 85).

• The following types of audio signals can be only input at HDMI

input jacks:

–DSD

– Dolby TrueHD

– Dolby Digital Plus

– DTS-HD Master Audio

– DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

■ Video signal flow

You can deinterlace and convert the resolution of the video

signals by using “VIDEO SET” parameters. See page 89 for

details.

• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT

VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the

input signals is as follows:

1. COMPONENT VIDEO

2. S VIDEO

3. VIDEO

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI input jacks cannot be

output from analog video output jacks.

• The analog component video signals (with 480i (NTSC)/576i

(PAL) of resolution only) are converted to the S-video or

composite video signals and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution

are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

• The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT

jacks and is not recorded.

Audio and video signal flow

Notes

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog output

Digital output

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

OutputInput

Video conversion ON (see page 89)

24 En

Connections

Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.

You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on

the rear panel of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO”

parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play

back HDMI audio signals (see page 85).

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI

connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals

being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the

HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

• Set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see

page 89) to display the short message displays and sound field

parameter displays.

• The “SET MENU” and sound field parameter displays appear

with the gray background depending on the input video signal

format and the setting of the parameters in “DISPLAY SET”

(see page 88).

• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic

audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync

feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing

automatically (see page 84). Connect the video monitor to the

HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature.

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

PRPB

(or projector)

Video in

Component video in

S-video in

HDMI in

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 89), be sure

to make the same type of video connections as those made for

your TV (see page 24). For example, if you connected your TV

to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your

other components to the VIDEO jacks.

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 89), the

converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type

of video connections between each component.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the

default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for

“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O

ASSIGNMENT” (see page 86).

• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL and the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jacks, priority

is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack.

• The short message displays do not appear when the component

video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions

are input.

■ Connecting a Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player

Connect your Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player to the HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit to perform the features of the Blu-ray

Disc or HD DVD completely.

Connecting other components

Notes

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

BD/

HD DVD

OPTICAL

BD/HD DVD

BD/

HD DVD

IN1

L R

PRPBY

Blu-ray Disc or

HD DVD player

HDMI out

Component out

S-video out Video out

Optical out

Audio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

26 En

Connections

■ Connecting a DVD player

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

DVD

OPTICAL

DVD

IN2

L R

PRPBY

DVD player

HDMI out

Coaxial out

Component out

S-video

out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR

* When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO OUT,

VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.

■ Connecting a set-top box

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

DVR

COAXIAL

VCR

DVR

OUT OUT

ININ

DVR

IN4

DVR

OUT

DVD recorder, PVR or VCR

Coaxial out

S-video out

Video out

Audio in

Video in

S-video in

Audio out

HDMI out

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

DTV/

CBL

OPTICAL

DTV/CBL

DTV/

CBL

IN3

L R

PRPBY

Satellite receiver,

cable TV receiver or HDTV

decoder

HDMI out

Component out

Video out

Audio out

S-video out

Optical out

28 En

Connections

■ Connecting audio components

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.

• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-

output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.

• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL jack and the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack to an audio component, the

priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack.

Notes

PHONO

GND

IN(PLAY)

OUT(REC)

CD-R

AUD IO

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

COAXIAL

MD/

TAP E

CD-R

OPTICAL

TAP E

MD/

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

L RL RL RL R

CD recorder

Turntable CD player MD recorder or

tape deck

Audio in

Optical in

Audio out

Optical out

Audio in

Audio out

Optical in

Ground

Audio out

Coaxial out

Audio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

29 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting an external amplifier

This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output

or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.

• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer unit.

• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77).

• You can use the automatic setup feature even if you use an external amplifier (see page 37).

1 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel output jack.

2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel output jacks.

3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

4 SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.

• Set the “SUR.B L/R SP” to “LRGx2”, “LRGx1”, “SMLx2” or

“SMLx1” and “PRESENCE SP” to “NONE” (see page 78) to

output the surround back channel signals at the SUR.BACK/

PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.

• Set the “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to

“NONE” (see page 78) to output the presence channel signals at

the SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.

• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 19), this unit output

the front channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK/PRESENCE

PRE OUT jacks.

5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

Notes

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

4321

30 En

Connections

■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or

pre-amplifier.

If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH” (see page 87), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in

“MULTI CH” together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically

turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected as the input source, only the signals input at

MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output from the connected headphones.

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in

“MULTI CH” (see page 85).

Notes

MULTI CH INPUT

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

SURROUND

SB(8CH)

Subwoofer

out

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Center out

Surround

out

Front out

Note

MULTI CH INPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

SURROUND

SB(8CH)

TAPE

MD/

(C)

()

LRLR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front out

Subwoofer

out

Center out

Surround back out

Surround out

31 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal

dock

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear

panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), where you

can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod

using the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) to

the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its

dedicated cable.

■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

When the components are the Yamaha products and have

the capability of the transmission of the remote control

signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT

jack to the remote control input and output jack with the

monaural analog mini cable as follows. See page 108 for

more details of this feature.

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit.

The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel

take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

DOCK

Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10,

sold separately)

REMOTE

OUT

Yamaha

component

(CD or DVD

player, etc.)

Remote

control in

Remote

control out

Infrared signal

receiver or

Yamaha

component

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the

front panel

Caution

Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other

components before making connections.

Note

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

ON/OFF

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

S-Video output

Video output

Audio

output

Optical output

32 En

Connections

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals. In general, these antennas should provide

sufficient signal strength.

• (Asia and General models only) Be sure to set the tuner

frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area

(see page 116).

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

■ Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after

all other connections are complete, then plug the AC

power cable into an AC wall outlet.

(Asia model only) Select on of the supplied power cables suitable

for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before plugging

this unit into the AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model............................................................... None

Other models......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to

these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For

information on the maximum power or the total power

consumption of the components that can be connected to

these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 131.

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

Ω

UNBAL.

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft)

vinyl-covered wire extended

outdoors from a window.

Connecting the power cable

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

To the AC wall outlet

33 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

2 Press and hold

STRAIGHT on the front

panel and then press

MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“SPEAKER IMP.”.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“6Ω MIN”.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

When you turn on this unit by pressing

MASTER ON/

OFF, the main zone is turned on.

When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few

seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

■ Turning off this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF position to

turn off this unit.

•

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as

POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control are

operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF is pressed

inward to the ON position.

• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn

off this unit.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

STANDBY

)

to set the main zone to the standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

■ Turning on the main zone from the

standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or

POWER) to

turn on the main zone.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few

seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

• These buttons are operational only when

MASTER ON/

OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

Setting the speaker impedance

Caution

If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this

unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front

speakers.

Note

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

Turning this unit on and off

Notes

If there are some problems...

• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.

• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this

unit. See page 124 for details.

34 En

Connections

1 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at one of the HDMI input jacks (see page 21).

2 DOCK indicator

Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit

(see page 31).

3 Battery charge indicator

Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the

stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see

page 61).

4 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

5 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator

• Indicates the current volume level.

• The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function

is on (see page 44).

6 Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

7 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

8 Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

• Indicate the channel components of the current

digital input signal.

• Light up or flash according to the settings of the

speakers when this unit is in the auto setup

procedure (see page 37) or the speaker level setting

procedure in the “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see

page 79).

Presence speaker indicators

Light up according to setting for “PRESENCE SP”

(see page 78) in “SPEAKER SET” when this unit is in

the auto setup procedure (see page 37) or the speaker

level setting procedure in the “SPEAKER LEVEL”

(see page 79).

You can make settings for the presence and surround back

speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see

page 37) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE

SP” (see page 78) and “SUR.B L/R SP” (see page 78) in

“SPEAKER SET”.

Front panel display

MUTE

VOLUME

LL C R

SL SB SR

DSD

PCM

96/24

TUNED

STEREO

AUTO

MEMORY

ZONE2

ZONE3

SLEEP

PTY HOLD

PTY

EON

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DOCK

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

YPAO ENHANCER

VIRTUAL

HiFi

DSP

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

LFE

SBRSBL

TUNED

STEREO

AUTO

MEMORY

ZONE2

ZONE3

SLEEP

PTY HOLD

PTY

EON

543

See page 35 for details.

Presence speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

LL C R

SL SB SR

LFE

SBRSBL

35 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

9 Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode.

TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station

(see page 54).

STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal

for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator

is lit (see page 54).

AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning

mode (see page 54).

MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show that a station can be stored

(see page 55).

0 ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators

Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on

(see page 109).

A SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 45).

B Radio Data System indicators

(Europe model only)

PTY HOLD

Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

PS, PTY, RT and CT

Light up according to the selected Radio Data System

display mode.

EON

Lights up when the EON data service is being

received.

C YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the

speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without

any modifications (see page 37).

D Input signal indicators

Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct

Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital

audio signals.

E DSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound

field programs are selected.

CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (see page 46).

HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 46).

VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 51).

F Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 46).

G ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

turned on (see page 50).

H Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 43).

I SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 51).

J Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

DSD

PCM

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

YPAO ENHANCER

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

VIRTUAL

HiFi

DSP

36 En

Connections

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Display window (A)

Shows the name of the selected input source that you can

control.

Infrared window (P)

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

Transmit indicator (O)

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

Operation mode selector (C)

The function of some buttons depends on the operation

mode selector position.

AMP

Operates the amplifier function of this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (see page 98).

Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or

PHONO (see page 97).

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following

conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 99.

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

Using the remote control

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

Notes

Opening and closing the front

panel door

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

37 En

PREPARATION

English

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome

listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer

microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit is in

the automatic setup procedure. Keep quiet when you leave the

room. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete

the automatic setup procedure.

• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.

• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector

on the remote control to

AMP.

■ Basic procedure of the automatic setup

1 Make sure of the following check points

before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.

❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

❏

The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume

level is set to about half way (or slightly less).

❏ The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏ If you use the external amplifiers (see page 29),

the amplifiers are turned on and the settings are

appropriate.

❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

“MIC ON” and “View OSD Menu” appears in the

front panel display.

The following menu screen appears on the video

monitor.

You can also run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu

that appears in the front panel display. When you connect

the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack, the

following display appears in the front panel display. This

manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO

SETUP” procedure.

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would

be when you are seated in your listening position. You can

use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer

microphone to the tripod (etc.).

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Using AUTO SETUP

Notes

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

Omni-directional

microphone

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO

WIRING;;;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;;;CHECK

EQ;;;;;;;;;NATURAL

LEVEL;;;;;;;;CHECK

START

UP/DOWN

Start

AUTO SETUP

ENTER TO START

Optimizer microphone

38 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

4 Press

ENTER to start the setup

procedure.

This unit starts the automatic setup procedure. Loud

test tones are output from each speaker during the

automatic setup procedure. Once all items are set, the

result display appears in the OSD.

• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit. If you perform any operation while

this unit is in the automatic setup procedure, “E-9:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD. In such cases, select

“RETRY” to restart the automatic setup procedure.

• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit

is in the automatic setup procedure. Keep quiet when you

leave the room. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this

unit to complete the automatic setup procedure.

The display changes as follows.

The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows.

Number of speakers SP

Displays the number of speakers connected to this

unit in the following order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

Speaker distance DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening

position in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Speaker level LVL

Displays the speaker output level in the following

order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output

level

• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing

procedure, restart from step 2.

• If an error occurs during the automatic setup procedure,

the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen

appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on

page 41.

• When this unit detects potential problems during the

automatic setup procedure, “WARNING” and the number

of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT”

(see page 41).

• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR

PHASE:REV” appears during the automatic setup

procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND

MENU” (see page 79) is automatically set to

“REVERSE”.

5 Press

ENTER to display the setup results

in detail.

Notes

[] :

[

AUTO SETUP

INITIALIZING

PRE CHECK

MAIN CHECK

EQUALIZING

LEVEL

||||||||;;;;;;;;;;

EXIT

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO

WIRING;;;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;;;CHECK

EQ;;;;;;;;;NATURAL

LEVEL;;;;;;;;CHECK

START

UP/DOWN

Start

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 3.60/4.30m

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

UP/DOWN

Detail

Notes

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 3.60/4.30m

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

UP/DOWN

Detail

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

RESULT WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;OK

Select

Return

39 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

6 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the setup result displays.

• Press

k / n to toggle between the parameters in a

results.

• If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see

page 72).

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of

your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to

recalibrate your system.

• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may

be longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer or external amplifiers if

you connect them.

• In the “EQUALIZING” results, different values may be set

for the same band to provide finer adjustments.

7 Press

ENTER to return to the top result

display.

8 Press

l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”.

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

9 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

10 Press

SET MENU to exit from “SET

MENU”.

• After you have completed the automatic setup procedure, be

sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away

from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.

Notes

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker distance

from the listening position

Result of the speaker detection

and size

Results of the parametric

equalizer of each speaker

Results of the speaker output

level

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 3.60/4.30m

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

UP/DOWN

Enter

Notes

SYSTEM MEMORY feature

You can save multiple result of the automatic setup by using

the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See page 93 for details.

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 3.60/4.30m

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

UP/DOWN

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SYSTEM MEMORY

;SIGNAL INFO

UP/DOWN

Enter

40 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

■ Customizing the measurements

You can select the parametric equalizer type, and activate

or deactivate each check items.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to this unit and place the microphone

appropriately.

Refer to the steps 1 to 3 of “Basic procedure of the

automatic setup” on page 37.

2 Press

k repeatedly to select “SETUP” and

then press

l / h to select the desired

setting.

Choices: AUTO, RELOAD

• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO

SETUP” settings and override the current settings.

When you select “RELOAD”, the previous auto

setup result appears in the OSD. See step 4 on

page 38 and carry out the operations.

• “RELOAD” is available only when you have previously

run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.

• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 2, no test tones are

output and the result of the previous automatic setup

appears in the OSD.

3 Press

k / n repeatedly to select “WIRING”,

“DISTANCE”, “SIZE”, “EQ”, or “LEVEL” and

then press

l / h to select the desired

setting.

This unit performs the following checks:

Speaker wiring WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the

polarity of each speaker.

Speaker distance DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the

listening position and adjusts the timing of each

channel.

Speaker size SIZE

Checks the frequency response of each speaker and

sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each

channel.

Choices: CHECK, SKIP

• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust

the item.

• Select “SKIP” to skip the item and perform no

adjustments.

Parametric equalizer type EQ

Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified

frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the

crucial frequency bands for the listening room and

adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to

create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can

select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment

from the following choices.

Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT, SKIP

• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency

response of all speakers with higher frequencies

being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT

setting sounds a little harsh.

• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response

of all speakers. Recommended if all of your

speakers are of similar quality.

• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response

of each speaker in accordance with the sound of

your front speakers. Recommended if your front

speakers are of much higher quality than your other

speakers.

• Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no

adjustments.

Volume level LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

Choices: CHECK, SKIP

• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust

this item.

• Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no

adjustments.

4 After the setting of the measurement, start

the automatic setup procedure.

Refer to steps 4 to 6 of “Basic procedure of the

automatic setup” on page 38 for details.

Notes

SYSTEM MEMORY feature

You can save multiple result of the automatic setup by using

the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See page 93 for details.

41 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

■ If an error screen appears

Press

l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and

then press

ENTER.

The following display is an example where “E-9:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD.

Choices: RETRY, EXIT

• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• If “E-5:NOISY” appears in the OSD, you can also select

“PROCEED” and let this unit continue the automatic setup.

However, we recommend that you perform the automatic setup

procedure again for more accurate adjustment.

• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears in the OSD, you can

select only “EXIT”.

• For details about each error message, refer to the “AUTO

SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 123.

■ If “WARNING” appears

When this unit detects potential problems during the

automatic setup procedure, “WARNING” appears in the

result display. Check the warning messages to correct your

speaker settings.

Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at

“WARNING” and then press

ENTER to

display the detailed information about the

warning.

The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates

the number of warning messages.

2 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the warning displays.

• For details about each warning message, refer to the

“AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on

page 123.

• When the corresponding warning message is not

applicable to a speaker, “–––” is displayed instead.

• If the volume level setting of the connected subwoofer is

too high or low, “TOO LOUD” (the volume level setting is

too high) or “TOO LOW” (the volume level setting is too

low) is displayed in the “W-3:LEVEL ERROR” display.

Adjust the volume level setting of the connected

subwoofer appropriately.

3 Press

ENTER to return to the top result

display.

The adjustment are made even if “WARNING” appears, however

the adjustment may not be optimal.

Note

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

ERROR

E-9:USER CANCEL

Don't operate

any function

>RETRY EXIT

Select

Enter

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

ERROR

E-5:NOISY

Keep silent

>RETRY EXIT PROCEED

Select

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

WARNING 2

RESULT

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 3.60/4.30m

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

UP/DOWN

Detail

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

WARNING

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Reverse channel

FL ---

CENTER

--- PR

SL ---

SBL ---

Select

Return

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

WARNING

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

--- FR

CENTER

PL ---

--- SR

--- SBL

SWFR:TOO LOUD

Select

Return

42 En

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

• See page 44 to display the input source information.

• You can display a gray background in the OSD when there

is no video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK”

in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 88).

• You can turn on or off the short message displays on the

video monitor. See pages 88 for details.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press one of the input selector buttons (1))

to select the desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for

a few seconds.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source

component.

• See page 54 for details about FM/AM tuning

instructions.

Rotate

VOLUME

(or press

VOLUME +/–

)

to adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

Control range: MUTE, –80.0 dB (minimum) to

+16.5 dB (maximum)

See page 53 to adjust the level of each speaker.

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or press

one of the sound field program selector

buttons (N) repeatedly) to select the desired

sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display and in the OSD. See

page 46 for details about sound field programs.

Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input

source (see page 43).

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• To display information about the currently selected input source

in the OSD, see page 44 for details.

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to

“DTS” before the playback (see page 86).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Basic procedure

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

BD/HD DVD

Currently selected input

source

Available input sources

Note

Movie

Sci-Fi

Currently selected sound field program

Currently selected sound field program category

43 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack

assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are

assigned to an input source.

• We recommend that you set the audio input jack select setting to

“AUTO” in most cases.

• You can adjust the default audio input jack select setting of this

unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 91).

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (1)) to select

the desired input source.

Press

AUDIO SELECT

(or

AUDIO SEL

)

repeatedly to select the desired audio input

jack select setting.

This feature is not available when no digital input jack

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,

HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when

the HDMI input jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in

“INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see

page 86).

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 30) as the input

source.

Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front panel

to select MULTI CH (or press

MULTI CH IN).

Use “MULTI CH” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the

parameters for “MULTI CH” (see page 85).

Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input

source.

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

activates automatically (see page 51).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks of this unit is selected as the input source, only the signals

input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output from

the connected headphones.

• All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.

(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.

When no signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH

TUNER

MD/TAPE

BD/HD DVD

DVD

DVR

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX

A.SEL: AUTO

Currently selected audio input

jack select setting

Available input sources

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

Using your headphones

Notes

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

ON/OFF

44 En

Playback

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press

MUTE again to resume

the audio output.

• You can also rotate

VOLUME on the front panel or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio

output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”

parameter in “VOLUME MENU” (see page 81).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL

INFO” and then press

ENTER.

The audio information about the input source appears

in the OSD.

3 Press

l / h to toggle between the audio

and video information displays.

The information is also appears in the front panel display.

Press 3k / n repeatedly to change the displayed

information.

4 Press

SET MENU on the remote control

again to exit from “SET MENU”.

■ Audio information

• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include

the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are

encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.

• Even if you make settings to output bitstreames directly, some

players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus

bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the

DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.

■ Video information

“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

Muting the audio output

Displaying the input source

information (SIGNAL INFO)

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SYSTEM MEMORY

;SIGNAL INFO

UP/DOWN

Enter

FORMAT

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

DIALOG

The dialogue normalization level preset to the

current input bitstream signal (see page 125).

FLAG

Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.).

Notes

HDMI SIGNAL

Type of the source video signals and

the video signals output at the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit.

HDMI RES.

Resolution of the input signal (analog

or HDMI) and the output signal

(HDMI).

ANALOG RES.

Resolution of the source video signals

and the analog video signals output at

the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT

jacks of this unit.

HDMI ERROR

(HDMI MESSAGE)

Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices. See

page 120 for details.

Note

45 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons (1) on the

remote control to select a video source and then

an audio source.

Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the

desired setting to select the default background video input source

of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 87).

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 32).

1 Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (1)) to select

the desired input source.

2 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the instruction manual for the source

component.

• See page 54 for details about FM/AM tuning

instructions.

3 Press

SLEEP (or

SLEEP) repeatedly to

set the amount of time.

Each time you press

SLEEP (or

SLEEP), the

front panel display changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching

the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep

timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front

panel display, and the display returns to the selected

sound field program.

■ Cancelling the sleep timer

Press

SLEEP (or

SLEEP) repeatedly until

“SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

MAIN

ZONE ON/OFF (or

STANDBY) to set the main zone to the

standby mode.

Playing video sources in the

background of an audio source

Using the sleep timer

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

Audio sources

Video sources

SLEEP 120min. SLEEP 90min.

SLEEP 60min.SLEEP 30min.SLEEP OFF

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min.

Flashes

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

Lights up

SLEEP OFF

Disappears

46 En

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing

(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

• The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and

DTS-HD Master Audio sources.

• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from

the front, back, left and right.

• You can change sound field parameters. See page 64 for details.

Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press one of the sound field selector buttons (N)

repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 43) or when this unit is in the Pure Direct

mode (see page 52).

• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field

program, this unit applies the selected program without

activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to

48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

Sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

Sound field program descriptions

Sound field indicators

DIALOG LIFT

SB ROOM SIZES. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLYS.INIT. DLY

P.ROOM SIZE

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

P.INIT. DLYSUR.

DSP LEVEL

MOVIE

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

Available sound field parameters (see page 66)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Created sound

fields

CINEMA DSP

HiFi DSP

Category of the

program

Presence sound field

Listening position

Surround left

sound field

Surround right

sound field

Surround back sound field

47 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For audio music sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 52), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51) or

surround decode mode (see page 69).

CLASSICAL Hall in Munich

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal

standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is

at the center left of the arena.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALOG LIFT

CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna

This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALOG LIFT

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

CLASSICAL

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALOG LIFT

CLASSICAL

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the

high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself

reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALOG LIFT

CLASSICAL Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are

suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALOG LIFT

LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage

located in the corner.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALOG LIFT

LIVE/CLUB Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALOG LIFT

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

48 En

Sound field programs

■ For various sources

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the

listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALOG LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre

This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left

of the hall.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALOG LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in

a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALOG LIFT

Note

ENTERTAINMENT Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,

the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an

optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Action Game

This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per

channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a

clear sense of directions.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game

This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design

used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the

movie scenes in the game.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

49 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For visual sources of music

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

■ For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder (SUR.) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 71 for details.

The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

Note

ENTERTAINMENT Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot

live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to

the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera”

offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of

presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent

beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

Note

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE Standard

This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel

audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded

by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

SUR.

DSP LEVEL

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

S. LIVENESS

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

SB LIVENESS

DIALOG LIFT

MOVIE Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.

It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very

small to extremely large sound.

SUR.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

SUR.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

MOVIE

50 En

Sound field programs

■ Stereo playback

■ Compressed Music Enhancer

MOVIE Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The

reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.

SUR.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear

words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.

SUR.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INIT. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALOG LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater.

The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound

depth.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV. LEVEL

REV.DELAY

DIALOG LIFT

STEREO 2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 53 for details.

DIRECT

MOVIE

STEREO

STEREO 7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2

channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,

etc.

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

MUSIC ENHANCER Straight Enhancer

Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts.

EFFECT LEVEL

STEREO

HiFi DSP

ENHANCER

MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

EFFECT LEVEL

ENHANCER

51 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs without surround

speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the

natural sound field.

When you set “SUR. L/R SP”

to “NONE” (see page 78),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 46).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.

SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you

connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening

to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see

page 46). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 43).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see

page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 53) is selected, or

when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode.

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) to select

“STRAIGHT”.

The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the

active decoder appear in the front panel display.

■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

You can also select desired sound field program by rotating the

PROGRAM selector (or press one of the desired sound field

program buttons (N)) repeatedly.

Note

Notes

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources

STRAIGHT

52 En

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound

of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is

activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the

least circuitry.

Press

PURE DIRECT (or

PURE DIRECT)

to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode.

The

PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up

and the front panel display automatically turns off while

this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.

• When this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, this unit does not

output any video signals at the MONITOR OUT jacks and the

HDMI OUT jack.

• When you set the audio input jack select setting to “AUTO”,

“HDMI”, or “COAX/OPT” (see page 43) and play back the

bitstreams or multi-channel PCM sources, this unit activates the

corresponding decoder.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the Pure Direct mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker

level settings)

– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)

• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this

unit is turned off.

The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation

is performed.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front L/R and center speaker channels and the

subwoofer channel.

1 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS).

2 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to adjust

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

the low-frequency response (BASS).

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and

center speakers and the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the Pure Direct mode

is activated, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input source.

Using audio features

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

53 En

Using audio features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room” (see

page 37) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 79).

1 Press

LEVEL on the remote control

repeatedly to select the speaker you want to

adjust.

• Once you press

LEVEL on the remote control, you can

also select the speaker by pressing 3k / n.

• Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR.

B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see

page 78).

2 Press

l / h on the remote control to

adjust the speaker output level.

• Press

h to increase the value.

• Press

l to decrease the value.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels

and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.

Press

STEREO on the remote control

repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.

• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 77).

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the

PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

• See page 69 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo”

mode.

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

SUR.R

Surround right speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SUR.L

Surround left speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

2-channel stereo

54 En

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of

the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset

stations with each other.

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING MODE so that the AUTO

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h once to

begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

• Press

h to tune into a higher frequency.

• Press

l to tune into a lower frequency.

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING MODE so that the AUTO

indicator disappears from the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune

into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

FM/AM tuning

Note

Automatic tuning

AUTO

A FM 97.70MHz

Lights upNo colon (:)

Manual tuning

Note

A FM 97.70MHz

No colon (:)

55 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in

order. You can then recall any preset station easily by

selecting the preset station number.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select “FM” as the

reception band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold

MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

The preset station number as well as the AUTO and

MEMORY indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores

FM stations. Press

A/B/C/D/E and then

PRESET/

TUNING l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select

the preset station number under which the first station will be

stored.

• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM

stations automatically. Press

PRESET/TUNING so that the

colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press

PRESET/TUNING l after pressing and holding

MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for

all the available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning”.

• (Europe model only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting

station are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning.

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.

See page 54 for tuning instructions.

2 Press

MEMORY on the front panel.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

3 Press

A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A to E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

Automatic preset tuning

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM 97.70MHz

Flashes Flashes

Notes

Manual preset tuning

MEMORY

Flashes

MEMORY

A :FM 97.70MHz

Preset station group

Flashes

Colon (:)

56 En

FM/AM tuning

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

• Press

h to select a higher preset station number.

• Press

l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press

MEMORY while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

1 Press

A/B/C/D/E (or

A/B/C/D/E l / h)

repeatedly to select the desired preset

station group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select

the desired preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

Notes

MEMORY

A1:FM 97.70MHz

Preset station number Flashes

A1:FM 97.70MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

Selecting preset stations

When performing this operation with the remote control, set

the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press

TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

A1:FM 97.70MHz

57 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E

and

PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front

panel.

See “Selecting preset stations” on page 56.

2 Press and hold

EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using

A/B/C/D/

E and

PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4 Press

EDIT again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

Exchanging preset stations

MEMORY

E1:FM 97.70MHz

FlashesFlashes

MEMORY

A5:FM 97.70MHz

Flashes

EDIT E1-A5

58 En

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various

Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON

(enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.

Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data

System information: PS (program service), PTY (program

type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The

corresponding indicators light up in the front panel

display.

• You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes

only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator

lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this

unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the

station.

• You can select only the available Radio Data System display

modes being offered by the station.

• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit

may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In

particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and

may not be available even when the other Radio Data System

display modes are available.

• In case of poor reception conditions, press KTUNING MODE

on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while

this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception

may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front

panel display.

• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the

program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric

characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters

are displayed with the “_” (underscore).

• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT

WAIT” appears in the front panel display.

1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using the automatic preset tuning

to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting

stations (see page 55).

• You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the

desired Radio Data System broadcasting station

from the preset ones.

2 Press 6FREQ/TEXT on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data

System display mode.

• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data

System program currently being received.

• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data

System program currently being received.

• Select “RT” to display the information on the

Radio Data System program currently being

received.

• Select “CT” to display the current time.

Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)

Displaying the Radio Data System

information

Notes

CTRTPTYPS

Frequency display

59 En

Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to select the desired radio program by

program type from the all preset Radio Data System

broadcasting stations.

Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data

System broadcasting stations (see page 55).

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press

TUNER on

the remote control to select “TUNER” as the

input source.

2 Press

BAND repeatedly to select “FM” as

the reception band.

3 Press

PTY SEEK MODE on the remote

control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK

mode.

The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in

the front panel display.

To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press

PTY SEEK

MODE on the remote control again.

4 Press

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote

control to select the desired program type.

The name of the selected program type appears in the

front panel display.

Selecting the Radio Data System

program type (PTY SEEK mode)

Flashes

NEWS

Program type Descriptions

NEWS

News

AFFAIRS

Current affairs

INFO

General information

SPORT

Sports

EDUCATE

Education

DRAMA

Drama

CULTURE

Culture

SCIENCE

Science

VARIED

Light entertainment

POP M

Popular music

ROCK M

Rock music

M.O.R. M

Middle-of-the-road music (easy-

listening)

LIGHT M

Light classics

CLASSICS

Serious classics

OTHER M

Other music

Lights up

POP M

60 En

Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)

5 Press

PTY SEEK START on the remote

control to start searching for all the available

Radio Data System preset stations.

The name of the selected program type flashes and

the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel

display while this unit is searching for stations.

To stop searching for stations, press

PTY SEEK START

on the remote control again.

• This unit stops searching for stations when a station

broadcasting the selected program type is found.

• If the station found is not the one you desire, press

PTY

SEEK START again to resume searching for another

station broadcasting the same program type.

Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other

networks) data service of the Radio Data System station

network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System

program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this

unit automatically searches for all the available preset

stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data

service of the selected program type for a certain duration

of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this

unit automatically switches to the local station

broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back

to the national station once the EON data service ends.

• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is

available.

• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only

when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data

System station.

1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front

panel display.

If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel

display, select another Radio Data System program so

that the EON indicator lights up.

3 Press

EON on the remote control

repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data

System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS,

INFO or SPORT).

The name of the selected program type appears in the

front panel display.

To cancel the EON feature, press

EON on the remote

control repeatedly until the name of the program type

disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel

display.

Notes

POP M

PTY HOLD

Flashes Lights up

Using the enhanced other

networks (EON) data service

Notes

EON

NEWS

Lights up

61 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 31), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.

You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression

artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 50).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 122.

• Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal

of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges

the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in

“INPUT MENU” (on page 87).

• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 34) appears in the

front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as

the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done

with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)

or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Remote control operation

■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD

of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in

the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”

parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 89). You can

also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.

Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to

suit your personal preferences.

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy

watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

Using iPod™

Notes

Controlling iPod™

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1V-AUX.

Button Function

3 ENTER Subsequent menu

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

6 ll Search backward (Press and hold)

Search forward

(Press and hold)

a Skip forward

b Skip backward

s Stop

e Pause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

p Play (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

F MENU Previous menu

I DISPLAY Display

Notes

62 En

Using iPod™

1 Press

DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n / l / h on the remote control

to navigate the iPod menu and then press

ENTER to begin playback of the selected

song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),

Albums (albums), Songs (songs),

Genres (genres), Composers (composers),

Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

• When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ”

appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being

shuffled.

• Press 3ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of

“Shuffle”.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

• When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or

“ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a

sequence of songs are being repeated.

• Press 3ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of

“Repeat”.

■ The function of the play information

display

1 Track number/total tracks

2 Name of the artist

3 Name of the album

4 Name of the song

5 Progress bar

6 Elapsed time

7 Shuffle and repeat icons

8 (playback), (pausing), (search forward) or

(search backward)

9 Remaining time

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE and then

press 1V-AUX.

Notes

iPod Top

Playlists >

Artists >

Albums >

Songs >

Genres >

Composers >

Settings >

Notes

All

iPod[Play]

1/9



FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia



|||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

All

63 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• TONE CONTROL (see page 52) and the volume settings, the speaker level (see page 79) and the sound field programs (see page 46)

do not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,

analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is

connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• The analog audio and video signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks and DVR or VCR

OUT jacks for recording.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (1)) to select

the source component you want to record

from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Recording

Caution

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded.

Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its

operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be

disturbed due to those signals.

64 En

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see

page 90). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,

set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

PARAMETER on the

remote control.

The following display is shown in the OSD.

3 Press one of the sound field program

selector buttons (

repeatedly to select the

desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press

k / n to select the desired sound

field parameter and then

l / h to change

the selected sound field parameter value.

•Press

h to increase the value.

•Press

l to decrease the value.

• For details about the function and control range of each sound

field parameter, see page 66.

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

sound field parameter name in the OSD.

• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field

program parameter settings.

• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field

programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.

In this case, press 3k / n to scroll through pages.

• If you press and hold 3l / h to change the sound field

parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown

momentarily in the front panel display.

• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,

press 3n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then press

3h. Once the confirmation screen appears in the OSD, press

3h to confirm or 3l to cancel the initialization.

5 Press

PARAMETER to turn off the sound

field parameter display.

Advanced sound configurations

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Note

Sound field program category

Sound field parameters Sound field parameter

values

[p]/[[]:

MOVIE 1/2

Sci-Fi

SUR.;;PLIIx Movie

DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0

Select

Cursor

SYSTEM MEMORY feature

You can save multiple customized sound field parameter

settings by using the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See

page 93 for details.

[[]:

MOVIE 2/2

Sci-Fi

SB INIT.DLY;;15ms

SB ROOM SIZE ;;1.0

DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0

INITIALIZE

Initialize

65 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Basic configuration of sound field

programs

Each sound field program has some parameters defining

the characteristics of the program. To customize the

selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/

or “DIALOG LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 64 for details.

Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound

field programs (DSP LEVEL)

Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect

sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field

in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to

adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows:

Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• the effect sound of the selected sound field

program is too weak.

• you cannot recognize any difference between the

sound field programs.

Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• the sound is vague.

• you feel that the additional sound effect is

excessive.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

Adjusting the vertical dialogue position

(DIALOG LIFT)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALOG LIFT”.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the

highest position.

• “DIALOG LIFT” is available only when “PRESENCE SP” is

set to “ON” (see page 78).

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial

dialogue position.

The DSP effect

sound level is low.

The DSP effect sound

level is high.

Notes

The ideal

dialogue

position

Move up to the ideal dialogue position.

66 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 64 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INIT.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the

apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first

reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the

listener.

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the

corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the

CINEMA DSP programs.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INIT.DLY)

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

67 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the

sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is

repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original

reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected

sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one

to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the

corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the

CINEMA DSP programs.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the

hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound

source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which

has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as

“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets

you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Sound field parameter Features

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

68 En

Advanced sound configurations

REV.TIME

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining

reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

REV.DELAY

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

REV.LEVEL

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Reverberation

ReverberationSource sound

REV.TIME

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

60 dB

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

69 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press

SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the

remote control to select the surround decode

mode.

You can select the desired surround decoder mode

depending on the type of source you are playing and your

personal preference.

You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press

PARAMETER and then 3k / n repeatedly on the remote

control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change

the value of the selected parameter by pressing 3l / h

repeatedly on the remote control.

Sound field parameter Features

DIRECT

(“2ch Stereo” only)

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo

sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).

• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front

left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the

following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 77).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 77) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see

page 77).

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

(“7ch Stereo” only)

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right

levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

EFFECT LEVEL

(“Straight Enhancer” and

“7ch Enhancer” only)

Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of

some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

Selecting decoders

70 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Decoder descriptions

When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the corresponding

decoder for each source.

SUR. DECODE

Sur. Decode

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

SUR. DECODE

Sur. Decode

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/

R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).

SUR. DECODE

Sur. Decode

PLIIx Music

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/

R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).

PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH

SUR. DECODE

Sur. Decode

PLIIx Game

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).

CENTER WIDTHDIMENSION

PLIIMusic

PLIIxMusic

SUR. DECODE

Sur. Decode

PANORAMA

+10

SUR.DECODE

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not

available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).

Available decoder parameters (see page 71) Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

decoder (SUR.)

Category and name

of the program

+10

SUR.DECODE

+10

SUR.DECODE

+10

SUR.DECODE

+10

SUR.DECODE

SUR. DECODE

Sur. Decode

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

+10

SUR.DECODE

SUR. DECODE

Sur. Decode

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

C. IMAGE

+10

SUR.DECODE

71 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Decoder parameter descriptions

■ Selecting decoders used with sound

field programs (SUR.)

Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with

MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).

See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field

program.

Available decoders

Decoder parameter Features

PANORAMA

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as

well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

DIMENSION

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front

or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

CENTER WIDTH

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

C.IMAGE

(“Neo:6 Music” only)

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to

1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)

Initial setting: 0.3

Decoder Functions

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro

Logic II) processing for movie

sources.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is

not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is

set to “NONE” (see page 78).

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

72 En

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP

Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 37).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Menu Parameter Functions Page

A)SPEAKER SET

LFE/BASS OUT

Selects the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the

low-frequency signals.

FRONT SP

Selects the size of the front speakers. 77

CENTER SP

Selects the size of the center speaker. 77

SUR. L/R SP

Selects the size and number of the surround speakers. 78

SUR.B L/R SP

Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers. 78

PRESENCE SP

Selects whether this unit uses the presence speakers. 78

CROSS OVER

Selects the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 77 and

78).

SUBWOOFER PHASE

Switches the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or

unclear.

PRIORITY

Prioritizes either the presence or the surround back speakers when

playing back sources that contain surround back channel signals using

the CINEMA DSP sound field programs.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

FR.L/FR.R/

CENT./SUR.L/

SUR.R/SB L/SB R/

SWFR/PR.L/PR.R

Adjust the balance the speaker levels between the front left or

surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET”

(see page 77).

C)SP DISTANCE

UNIT

Selects the unit to adjust the speaker distance. 80

FRONT L/FRONT R/

CENTER/SUR. L/

SUR. R/SB L/SB

R/SWFR/PRNS L/

PRNS R

Adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the

respective channel.

D)TEST TONE

— Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”,

“SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.

73 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Volume menu 2 VOLUME MENU

Sound menu 3 SOUND MENU

Parameter Functions Page

ADAPTIVE DRC

Selects whether this unit automatically adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the

volume level or not.

ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL

Selects whether this unit adjusts the DSP effect level automatically in conjunction with the

volume level or not.

MUTING TYPE

Adjusts how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 44). 81

MAX VOL.

Sets the maximum volume level of the main zone. 81

INIT. VOL.

Sets the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. 81

Menu Parameter Functions Page

A)EQUALIZER

EQ TYPE SELECT

Selects the type of equalizer. 82

GEQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of the speakers when you set “EQ TYPE

SELECT” to “GEQ”.

TEST

Selects whether this unit outputs the test tone while making adjustments

of “GEQ” or not.

B)LFE LEVEL

SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level. 83

HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level. 83

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

SPEAKER

Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the speakers. 83

HEADPHONE

Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the

headphones.

D)LIPSYNC

HDMI AUTO

Selects whether this unit activates the automatic audio and video

synchronization function (automatic lip sync) or not.

AUTO DELAY

Makes fine adjustments of the audio delay when the automatic audio

and video synchronization function is active.

MANUAL DELAY

Adjustment the audio delay manually when the connected video

monitor is not compatible with the automatic audio and video

synchronization function or “HDMI AUTO” is set to “OFF”.

E)AUDIO SET

EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES

decoders by using the connected surround back speakers.

TONE BYPASS

Selects whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry

when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).

F)HDMI SET

SUPPORT AUDIO

Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

74 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Input menu 4 INPUT MENU

Some parameters described below may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input

sources.

Option menu 5 OPTION MENU

Note

Parameter Functions Page

I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of

this unit do not correspond to your needs.

INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. 86

VOL. TRIM

Adjusts the level of the signal input at each jack. 86

DECODER MODE

Switches the decoder activation mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for

DTS signals.

STANDBY CHARGE

Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode (see page 61).

BGV

Selects the video source played back in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

INPUT CH

Selects the number of channels input from an external decoder. 87

FRONT

Selects the analog jacks at which the front channel signals from an external decoder are input

when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”.

Menu Parameter Functions Page

A)DISPLAY SET

DIMMER

Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 88

OSD SHIFT

Adjusts the vertical position of the OSD. 88

GRAY BACK

Selects whether this unit displays a gray background in your video

monitor when there is no video signal being input.

SHORT MESSAGE

Selects whether this unit displays the short messages on the video

monitor after you perform a certain operation.

ON SCREEN

Sets the time for which the iPod menu is displayed in the OSD after

you perform a certain operation.

FL SCROLL

Selects the mode to display the information of your iPod in the front

panel display.

75 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ System memory SYSTEM MEMORY

Use this feature to create your favorite settings and assign the settings to each

SYSTEM MEMORY button

(see page 93).

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 44).

B)VIDEO SET

VIDEO CONV.

Selects whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S

VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

COMPONENT I/P

Selects whether this unit activates the analog interlace/progressive

conversion of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO,

and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the analog video signals

deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at

the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.

HDMI SCALING

Selects whether this unit activates the HDMI up-conversion of the

analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-scaled analog video

signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI ASPECT

Adjusts the aspect ratio for analog video signals output at the HDMI

OUT jack.

C)MEMORY GUARD

— Prevents accidental changes to sound field program parameter values

and other system settings.

D)INIT. CONFIG

AUDIO SELECT

Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input

sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the

power of this unit.

DECODER MODE

Designates the default decoder mode for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

EXTD SUR.

Designates the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

E)ZONE SET

AMP

Selects how the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers are amplified. 91

VOLUME

Selects whether this unit controls the volume level of the audio signals

output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks.

MAX VOL.

Adjusts the maximum volume level in Zone 2 or Zone 3. 92

INIT. VOL.

Sets the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 when you turn on the power

of this unit.

Menu Parameter Functions Page

76 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

• If you press

PARAMETER during the “SET MENU”

operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.

• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each

parameter setting.

• Press

RETURN to return to the previous menu level.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU to enter “SET

MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.

3 Press

ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

menu.

The following displays are examples where “SOUND

MENU” is selected.

5 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

The following display is an example where “LFE

LEVEL” is selected.

6 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

and then

l / h to change the parameter

settings.

•Press

h to increase the value.

•Press

l to decrease the value.

7 Press

SET MENU to exit from “SET

MENU”.

Using SET MENU

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SYSTEM MEMORY

;SIGNAL INFO

UP/DOWN

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

MANUAL SETUP

1 BASIC MENU

2 VOLUME MENU

3 SOUND MENU

4 INPUT MENU

5 OPTION MENU

UP/DOWN

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

3 SOUND MENU

A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)LIPSYNC

E)AUDIO SET

F)HDMI SET

UP/DOWN

Enter

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

B)LFE LEVEL

SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;-20dB

UP/DOWN

Adjust

77 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker

settings. Most of the “BASIC MENU” parameters are set

automatically when you run the automatic setup.

Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the

“SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL” and “SP DISTANCE”.

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get natural bass sound:

Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well

as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to

“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get rich bass sound:

Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of

any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE

signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to

the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front

left and right channels are directed to the front left and

right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting.

When you do not use a subwoofer:

Select “FRONT” (front). The LFE signals, the

low-frequency signals of the front left and right

channels, and the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed

to the front left and right speakers regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

When the front speakers are large:

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the front speakers are small:

Select “SMALL” (small).

• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, the LFE signals

found in bitstream sources, the low-frequency signals of the

front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of

other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to

the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP”

setting.

• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select

only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is

set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the

value to “LARGE” automatically.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SMALL, LARGE

When the center speaker is large:

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the center speaker is small:

Select “SMALL” (small).

When you do not use the center speaker:

Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are

directed to the front left and right speakers.

1 BASIC MENU

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

1 BASIC MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

C)SP DISTANCE

D)TEST TONE

UP/DOWN

Enter

A)SPEAKER SET

LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR FRONT>BOTH

Measure for the speaker size

The woofer section of a speaker is

– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

Notes

A)SPEAKER SET

FRONT SP

SMALL >LARGE

A)SPEAKER SET

CENTER SP

NONE >SMALL LARGE

78 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SMALL, LARGE

When the surround speakers are large:

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the surround speakers are small:

Select “SMALL” (small).

When you do not use the surround speakers:

Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (see page 51), and “SUR.B L/R

SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.

See page 17 for the connection information of the surround

back speakers.

Surround back left/right speakers

SUR.B L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2

When the surround back left and right

speakers are large:

Select “LRGx2” (large x 2).

When the single surround back speaker is

large:

Select “LRGx1” (large x 1).

When the surround back left and right

speakers are small:

Select “SMLx2” (small x 2).

When the single surround back speaker is

small:

Select “SMLx1” (small x 1).

When you do not use the surround back

speakers:

Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel

signals are directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

See page 17 for the connection information of the surround

back speakers.

If the Dolby TrueHD audio signals are input and “SUR.B L/R

SP” is set to “NONE”, the left and right surround back

channels are not directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers

connected to this unit.

Choices: NONE, YES

When you do not use the presence speakers:

Select “NONE” (none).

When you use the presence speakers:

Select “YES” (yes).

“DIALOG LIFT” is available only when “PRESENCE SP” is set

to “YES”.

Bass cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). All frequencies below

the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to

the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER

SET” (see page 77).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

Measure for the speaker size

The woofer section of a speaker is

– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

A)SPEAKER SET

SUR. L/R SP

NONE >SMALL LARGE

A)SPEAKER SET

SUR.B L/R SP

NONE SMLx1 >SMLx2

Notes

Note

A)SPEAKER SET

PRESENCE SP

NONE >YES

A)SPEAKER SET

CROSS OVER

FREQ;;;;80Hz

79 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Presence/surround back channel priority

PRIORITY

Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the

surround back speakers when playing back 2-channel

audio sources using the sound field programs.

For details about the sound output from each speaker in sound

field programs, refer to “Sound output in each sound field

program” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77).

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting:

FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB

CENT./SUR.L/SUR.R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB

• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

• Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the

“SPEAKER LEVEL” setting (see page 80).

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/

R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 78).

Choice Functions

NORMAL

(normal)

Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.

REVERSE

(reverse)

Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.

Choice Functions

PRNS

Uses the presence speakers.

SUR.B

Uses the surround back speakers.

A)SPEAKER SET

SUBWOOFER PHASE

>NORMAL REVERSE

A)SPEAKER SET

PRIORITY

PRNS >SUR.B

SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusted speaker

FR.L

Front left speaker

FR.R

Front right speaker

CENT.

Center speaker

SUR.L

Surround left speaker

SUR.R

Surround right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PR.L

Presence left speaker

PR.R

Presence right speaker

Notes

B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2

FR.L

FR.R

CENT.

SUR.L

SUR.R

B)SPEAKER LEVEL 2/2

SB L

SB R

SWFR

PR.L

PR.R

80 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting:

FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/

PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)

SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if

“SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see

page 78).

■ Test tone D)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER

SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE”

settings.

If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s

length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening

position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,

calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

This function is automatically turned off if you exit “BASIC

MENU”.

Choice Functions

meters (m)

Adjusts speaker distances in meters.

feet (ft)

Adjusts speaker distances in feet.

SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

C)SP DISTANCE 2/2

SB L;;;;;;;;2.40m

SB R;;;;;;;;2.40m

SWFR;;;;;;;;3.00m

PRNS L;;;;;;3.00m

PRNS R;;;;;;3.00m

UP/DOWN

Adjust

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

C)SP DISTANCE 1/2

UNIT;;;;;;meters

FRONT L;;;;3.00m

FRONT R;;;;3.00m

CENTER;;;;;2.60m

SUR. L;;;;;2.40m

SUR. R;;;;;2.40m

UP/DOWN

Select

Notes

Choice Functions

OFF

This unit does not output the test tone for the

“SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and

“SP DISTANCE” settings.

This unit outputs the test tone for the

“SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and

“SP DISTANCE” settings.

Note

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

D)TEST TONE

>OFF ON

Select

Return

81 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume

settings.

Adaptive dynamic range control

ADAPTIVE DRC

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in

conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful

when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When

“ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls

the dynamic range as follows:

– If the VOLUME setting is low:

the dynamic range is narrow

–If the VOLUME setting is high:

the dynamic range is wide

• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal

sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU”

(see page 83).

• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.

The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function

when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).

Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP

effect level (see page 65) automatically in conjunction

with the volume level.

Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this unit

does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP

LEVEL” (see page 65).

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 44).

Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected

loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume

range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX

VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes

–80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level

is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX

VOL.” setting.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume

setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and

“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE SET” to set the initial volume

level in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Initial volume INIT. VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone

when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume

setting.

2 VOLUME MENU

Choice Functions

AUTO

Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

OFF

Does not adjust the dynamic range

automatically.

Note

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

2 VOLUME MENU

ADAPTIVE DRC;;;;OFF

ADAPTIVE DSP

LEVEL;;;;OFF

MUTING TYPE;;;;FULL

MAX VOL.;;;;+16.5dB

INIT. VOL.;;;;;;OFF

UP/DOWN

Select

Input level

Output level

Input level

AUTO

OFF

AUTO

OFF

VOLUME: low VOLUME: high

Choice Functions

AUTO

Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with

the volume level.

OFF

Does not adjust the DSP effect level

automatically.

Note

Choice Functions

FULL

Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB

Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

Notes

Note

82 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters.

■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the

graphic equalizer.

Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT

Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.

Currently applied parametric equalizer type (see page 40) appears

under “AUTO PEQ”.

You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO

SETUP” in advance (see page 37). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is

automatically selected as the default setting.

Graphic equalizer GEQ

Use this feature to match the tonal quality of the center,

surround L/R and surround back L/R, surround back,

presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer with that of the

front L/R speakers. You can adjust 7 frequency bands

(63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz).

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Press

k / n to select a frequency band and

l / h to adjust

the selected frequency band.

The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is

selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.

Test tone TEST

Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while

listening to a test tone. To select “TEST”, press 3k / n

repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.

3 SOUND MENU

Choice Functions

AUTO PEQ

Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in

“AUTO SETUP” (see page 37).

GEQ

Adjusts the built-in 7-frequency band graphic

equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speakers

matches. Press

ENTER to display the graphic

equalizer screen.

OFF

Deactivates the equalizing feature.

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

3 SOUND MENU

A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)LIPSYNC

E)AUDIO SET

F)HDMI SET

UP/DOWN

Enter

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

A)EQUALIZER

EQ TYPE SELECT

AUTO PEQ >GEQ OFF

[NATURAL]

Select

Enter

Note

Choice Functions

OFF

Does not output test tones and output the

currently selected source component.

Outputs test tones from the selected speakers.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)EQUALIZER 1/2

TEST >OFF ON

CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L

63Hz 0dB

160Hz 0dB

400Hz 0dB

1kHz 0dB

UP/DOWN

Select

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)EQUALIZER 2/2

TEST >OFF ON

CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L

2.5kHz 0dB

6.3kHz 0dB

16kHz 0dB

UP/DOWN

Adjust

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)EQUALIZER 1/2

TEST >OFF ON

CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L

63Hz 0dB

160Hz 0dB

400Hz 0dB

1kHz 0dB

UP/DOWN

Select

83 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Low-frequency effect level

B)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes bitstream signals.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speakers SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphones HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 77),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

jack.

■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding bitstream signals.

Speakers SPEAKER

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.

Headphones HEADPHONE

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the

headphones.

Note

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

B)LFE LEVEL

SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

UP/DOWN

Adjust

Choice Functions

MIN/AUTO

• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow

when this unit is decoding bitstream signals

(except Dolby TrueHD).

• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according

to the instruction of the input source signals

when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD

signals.

STD

Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When

this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the

dynamic range control is always active

regardless of the instruction of the input source

signals.

MAX

Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

SPEAKER;;;;;;;;;MAX

HEADPHONE;;;;;;;MAX

UP/DOWN

Select

84 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Audio and video synchronization

(Lip sync)

D)LIPSYNC

Use this feature to adjust the audio and video

synchronization.

HDMI Automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO

If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic

audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip

sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video

synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate

or deactivate the automatic lip sync.

Choices: ON, OFF

If the connected video monitor is compatible

with the automatic lip sync:

Select “ON”. Use “AUTO DELAY” to make fine

adjustments of the audio and video synchronization.

If the video monitor is not compatible with the

automatic lip sync or you do not want to use

the automatic lip sync:

Select “OFF”. Use “MANUAL DELAY” to adjust the

audio and video synchronization.

Auto delay AUTO DELAY

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and

video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to

“ON”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio

delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio

delay that you set in “AUTO DELAY”. This unit stores the value

of “offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync

compatible video monitors.

Manual delay MANUAL DELAY

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output

manually to synchronize audio with video images when

you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

■ Audio settings E)AUDIO SET

Extended surround EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,

Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the

connected surround back speakers.

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use this feature to select whether the audio output

bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and

“BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

D)LIPSYNC

HDMI AUTO;;;;;;OFF

AUTO DELAY;;;---ms

(offset;;;---ms)

MANUAL DELAY;;;0ms

UP/DOWN

Select

Choice Functions

AUTO

Activates the optimum decoder to play back

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit

recognizes a signal flag being input.

PLIIxMovie

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.

PLIIxMusic

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/

7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music

decoder.

EX/ES

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/

7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or

DTS-ES decoder.

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/

7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX

decoder.

OFF

Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1

channels.

Choice Functions

AUTO

Automatically bypasses the tone control

circuitry to provide the purest signal possible

when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB.

OFF

Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

E)AUDIO SET

EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO

TONE BYPASS;;;;AUTO

UP/DOWN

Select

85 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ HDMI set F)HDMI SET

Use this feature to select the component to play back

HDMI audio signals.

Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI

audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component

connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this

unit.

• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI

input jacks to the HDMI OUT jack only when this unit is turned

on even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”.

• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the

connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of

each connected component.

Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input

source.

Some parameters described above may not be available for all

input sources and some parameters are only available for specific

input sources.

Choice Functions

RX-V1800

Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The

HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input

jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack

on the rear panel of this unit.

OTHER

Plays back HDMI audio signals on another

HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT

jack.

Notes

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

F)HDMI SET

SUPPORT AUDIO

RX-V1800

Select

Return

4 INPUT MENU

Input source Parameter

A)TUNER INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

B)MULTI CH INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

INPUT CH

FRONT

C)PHONO

D)CD

E)CD-R

F)MD/TAPE

G)BD/HD DVD

H)DVD

I)DTV/CBL

J)DVR

K)VCR

L)V-AUX

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

DECODER MODE

M)DOCK INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

STANDBY CHARGE

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

4 INPUT MENU 1/2

A) TUNER

B) MULTI CH

C) PHONO

D) CD

E) CD-R

F) MD/TAPE

G) BD/HD DVD

UP/DOWN

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

4 INPUT MENU 2/2

H) DVD

I) DTV/CBL

J) DVR

K) VCR

L) V-AUX

M) DOCK

UP/DOWN

Enter

86 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Input/output assignment

I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively

connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the

INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on

the remote control).

• “NONE” appears in the OSD when any input source is not

assigned to the input/output jack.

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the input/output jack

names that have been changed from their previous settings.

• The currently assigned input source for the selected input/

output jack appears in the OSD (“Current ( DTV/CBL )” in the

display example above).

Input rename INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

You can also change the name of the input source that appears in

the display window (A) on the remote control. Refer to

“Changing source names in the display window” on page 102.

1 Press 3l / h to place the “_” (underscore)

under the space or the character you want to

edit.

2 Press 3k / n to select the character you

want to use and then press 3l / h to move

to the next space.

• You can use up to 9 characters for each input.

• Press

n to change the character in the following order,

or press

k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.

3 Repeat steps 1 through 2 to rename each

input source.

4 Press

ENTER to complete.

Volume trim VOL. TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the

level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in

volume when switching between input sources.

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio ZONE

OUT jacks.

Decoder mode DECODER MODE

Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. You can

designate the reassigned digital input jacks for DTS

signals.

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

J) DVR

COMPONENT IN;;;[C]

COAXIAL IN;;;;;(3)

OPTICAL IN;;;;NONE

OPTICAL OUT;;;NONE

HDMI IN;;;;;;;;[4]

Current ( DTV/CBL )

Select

Enter

[p]/[[]:

[ ]/[ ]:

[ENTER]:

[RETURN]:

[

A) TUNER

INPUT RENAME

TUNER . TUNER

Position

Character

Enter

Return

Notes

Choice Functions

AUTO

Automatically detects digital audio signal input

types and selects the appropriate decoder.

DTS

Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio

signals are input.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A) TUNER

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;+6.0dB

UP/DOWN

Adjust

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

D) CD

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

DECODER MODE;;;AUTO

UP/DOWN

Select

87 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode (see page 61).

Multi-channel input BGV BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

Input channels INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder (see page 30).

Choice: 6CH, 8CH

If the connected component outputs discrete

6-channel audio signals:

Select “6CH”.

If the connected component outputs discrete

8-channel audio signals:

Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the

analog audio jacks at which the front left and right

channel signals output from the connected component

are input.

If “AMP” is set to “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” or “BOTH” (see page 91), no

sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you

select “8CH”. In this case, select “6CH” and set the output setting

of the external component to 6 channels.

Front left and right channels input jack FRONT

If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the

analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel

signals output from the connected external decoder is

input.

Choices: CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, BD/HD DVD, DVD,

DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX

“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to

“8CH”.

Choice Functions

AUTO

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when

this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.

OFF

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only

when this unit is turned on.

Choice Functions

LAST

Automatically selects the last selected video

source as the background video source.

BD/HD DVD,

DTV/CBL,

DVD, DVR,

VCR, V-AUX

Selects the corresponding input source as the

background video source.

OFF

Does not play the video source in the

background.

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

B) MULTI CH

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH

UP/DOWN

Select

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

B) MULTI CH

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH

UP/DOWN

Select

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

B) MULTI CH

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;;;;8CH

FRONT;;;;;BD/HD DVD

UP/DOWN

Select

88 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Use “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to

set “OSD SHIFT” and “GRAY BACK” to the factory presets (see

page 116).

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Control step: 1

• Press

l to make the front panel display dimmer.

• Press

h to make the front panel display brighter.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

• Press

l to lower the position of the OSD.

• Press

h to raise the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Use this feature to display a gray background in your

video monitor when there is no video signal being input.

• Depending on the video signals being input or the system

setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be

displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to

“OFF”.

• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not

be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the

picture.

Short message display

SHORT MESSAGE

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message

display function.

The short message display does not appear in the following cases:

– when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p,

1080i or 1080p resolutions are input

– When HDMI video signals are input

On-screen display time ON SCREEN

Use this feature to set the time for which the iPod menu is

displayed in the OSD after you perform a certain

operation.

5 OPTION MENU

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

5 OPTION MENU

A)DISPLAY SET

B)VIDEO SET

C)MEMORY GUARD

D)INIT. CONFIG

E)ZONE SET

UP/DOWN

Enter

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)DISPLAY SET

DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;;;0

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;+5

GRAY BACK;;;;;;AUTO

SHORT MESSAGE;;;;ON

ON SCREEN;;;;ALWAYS

FL SCROLL;;;;;;CONT

UP/DOWN

Adjust

Choice Functions

AUTO

Displays a gray background on your video

monitor when there is no video signal being

input.

OFF

Does not display a gray background on your

video monitor.

Notes

Choice Functions

Activates the short message display function.

The contents of the front panel display appear at

the bottom of the screen each time you operate

this unit.

OFF

Deactivates the short message display function.

Note

Choice Functions

ALWAYS

Displays the OSD unceasingly during an

operation.

10S

Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

30S

Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

89 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set the mode to display the iPod menu

(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel

display.

■ Video settings B)VIDEO SET

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i

(PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite

video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution

are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted into component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the sound field

parameter display and short message display.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.

Component interlace/progressive up-conversion

COMPONENT I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog

interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite video, S-video and

component video jacks so that the analog video signals

deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The “COMPONENT I/P” parameter appears only when you set

“VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals

with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be

displayed on your video monitor when “COMPONENT I/P” is

set to “ON”. In such a case, set the “COMPONENT I/P”

parameter to “OFF”.

HDMI scaling HDMI SCALING

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-

scaling of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S

VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-

scaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack.

This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:

• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p or

1080p

• 480p/576p → 1080i, 720p or 1080p

This unit does not up-scale the analog component video signals

with 720p or1080i of resolution.

Choice Functions

CONT

Continuous mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

ONCE

Scroll-once mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

Choice Functions

Converts composite, S-video, and component

video signals interchangeably and up-converts

composite, S-video, and component video

signals to HDMI video signals.

OFF

Does not convert any signals.

Notes

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

B)VIDEO SET

VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON

COMPONENT I/P;;;OFF

HDMI SCALING;;;480p

HDMI ASPECT;;;THRGH

UP/DOWN

Select

Choice Functions

Activates the analog interlace/progressive up-

conversion of the analog video signals.

OFF

Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive up-

conversion of the analog video signals.

Notes

Choice Functions

THROUGH

Does not up-scale any analog video signals.

480p (or

576p), 1080i,

720p, 1080p

Up-scales analog video signals to 480p or 576p,

1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution.

Note

90 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

• The “HDMI SCALING” parameter appears only when you set

“VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

• If you connect your video monitor via HDMI connection, this

unit automatically detects the available video signal resolution

of the video monitor, and an asterisk (*) appears on the left of

the available video signal resolution(s).

• If this unit cannot detect the available video signal resolution(s)

of the connected video monitor, set “MONITOR CHECK” (see

page 116) to “SKIP” and then set “HDMI SCALING” again.

• This unit does not convert between 480 line video signals and

576 line video signals.

HDMI aspect ratio HDMI ASPECT

Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for

analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.

• When “HDMI SCALING” is set to “THROUGH”, you cannot

make any adjustments to “HDMI ASPECT”.

• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this

unit automatically ignores the setting of “HDMI ASPECT”.

• When “HDMI ASPECT” is set to “SMART”, the video images

of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.

• When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the

signals are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, the

setting of “HDMI ASPECT” does not affect the video signals

output at the HDMI OUT jack.

■ Memory guard C)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound

field program parameter and other system settings.

• You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to “ON”:

– “AUDIO SET” parameters (see page 84)

– “DECODER MODE” (see page 86)

– “MEMORY GUARD”

• When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, “ ” appears at the

top right of the “SET MENU” screen.

Notes

Choice Functions

THROUGH

Does not make any adjustments to the aspect

ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.

16:9

Displays video images with the aspect ratio of

4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio

of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and

left sides as a result.

SMART

Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to

your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9.

Notes

Choice Functions

OFF

Turns off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature.

Protects:

– sound field program parameters

– “AUTO SETUP” items

– “SYSTEM MEMORY” (“SAVE”)

– all speaker levels

– “MANUAL SETUP” items

Notes

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

C)MEMORY GUARD

>OFF ON

Select

Return

91 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Initial configuration D)INIT. CONFIG

Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input

jack select, active decoders and extended surround when

you turn on this unit.

Audio select AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting (see page 43) for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power

of this unit.

Decoder mode DECODER MODE

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode

(see page 86) for the input sources connected to the

DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

Extended surround EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode

(see page 84) for the input sources connected to the

DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

■ Zone set E)ZONE SET

Use this feature to set the items related in Zone 2 or Zone

Setting zone

Select the zone to set up “AMP”, “VOLUME”, “MAX

VOL.” and “INIT. VOL.”.

Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier AMP

Use this feature to select how the Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers are amplified. This parameter also effects the

speaker settings and the sound output of sound field

programs in the main zone.

Choices: EXT, [SP1], [SP2], BOTH

When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 are

connected to the external amplifier, and the

external amplifier is connected to the ZONE

OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks of this unit:

Select “EXT”. See “Using external amplifiers” on

page 108 for details.

When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP”

(see page 116), you can only set “AMP” to “EXT” in

“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3”.

When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

connected to the SP1 speaker terminals of this

unit directly:

Select “[SP1]”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of

this unit” on page 109 for details.

When you set “AMP” to “[SP1]” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE

3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is

output from the surround back speakers.

Choice Functions

AUTO

Automatically detects the type of audio input

signals and selects the appropriate audio input

jack select setting.

LAST

Automatically selects the last audio input jack

select setting used for the connected input

source.

Choice Functions

AUTO

Automatically detects the type of input signals

and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.

LAST

Automatically selects the last decoder mode

setting used for the connected input source.

Choice Functions

AUTO Automatically detects the digital audio input

signals and activates the appropriate decoder.

LAST Automatically selects the last decoder mode set

for “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU”.

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

D)INIT. CONFIG

AUDIO SELECT;;AUTO

DECODER MODE;;AUTO

EXTD SUR.;;;;;AUTO

Select

Return

Choice Functions

ZONE2

Sets the “ZONE SET” parameters for Zone 2.

ZONE3

Sets the “ZONE SET” parameters for Zone 3.

Note

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

E)ZONE SET

>ZONE2 ZONE3

AMP;;;;;;;;;;;;EXT

VOLUME;;;;;;;;;VAR

MAX VOL.;;;-30.0dB

INIT. VOL.;+16.5dB

UP/DOWN

Select

92 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

connected to the SP2 speaker terminals of this

unit directly:

Select “[SP2]”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of

this unit” on page 109 for details.

When you set “AMP” to “[SP2]” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE

3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is

output from the surround speakers.

If the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 are

connected to both the SP1 and SP2 speaker

terminals (for example, the speakers are

connected via the bi-amplifier connection, or

there are four speakers in a room) or if you

want to play back the same source in Zone 2

and Zone 3 simultaneously:

Select “BOTH”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of

this unit” on page 109 for details.

• When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” in “ZONE 2” or

“ZONE 3”, you can only set “AMP” to “EXT” in the other

zone setting.

• When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” in “ZONE 2” or

“ZONE 3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no

sound is output from both the surround and surround back

speakers.

Zone 2/Zone 3 volume VOLUME

Use this feature to select whether this unit controls the

volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE

OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks when you set “AMP” to

“EXT” (see page 91).

Choices: VAR, FIX

When you want to control the volume level of

the selected zone on this unit:

Select “VAR”. You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE

2 or ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with

VOLUME +/– on the remote control.

When you want to control the volume level of

the selected zone on the external amplifier:

Select “FIX”. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2

or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard line level.

Zone 2/Zone 3 maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”

setting. For example, “INIT. VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and then

“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this

unit next time.

Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume INIT. VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone

3 when the power of Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on.

Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”

setting.

Note

Notes

Note

93 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings

that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save the

following system setting parameters:

* The settings of “DYNAMIC RANGE”, “LFE LEVEL”, and

the tonal quality control for headphones are not saved.

■ Saving by the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”

to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding

SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

Press and hold one of the MSYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.

“MEMORY 1 SAVE Done” (example) appears in the front

panel display, and then this unit saves the current system

setting to the corresponding memory number.

If system settings are already saved in the selected memory

number, this unit overwrites the old system settings.

■ Saving by the SET MENU operation

You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”

to “MEMORY6” by using the “SYSTEM MEMORY”

menu in “SET MENU”.

1 Press

SET MENU on the remote control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press 3n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and

then press

ENTER.

The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears in the

OSD.

3 Press 3n to select “SAVE” and then press

ENTER.

The following menu appears in the OSD.

Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)

Saved parameters Page

“BASIC MENU” parameters

(except “TEST TONE”)

“VOLUME MENU” parameters

(except “INIT. VOL.”)

“SOUND MENU” parameters*

(except “EXTD SUR.”)

“DISPLAY SET” parameters

(except “SHORT MESSAGE”)

“VIDEO SET” parameters

Currently selected sound field program

(or the Pure Direct mode)

Sound field parameter settings

Tonal quality control settings*

Saving the current system settings

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

Note

SYSTEM MEMORY

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SYSTEM MEMORY

;SIGNAL INFO

UP/DOWN

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SYSTEM MEMORY

1 LOAD

2 SAVE

UP/DOWN

Enter

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

SAVE;;;;;;;CURRENT

Church in Freiburg

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ

YPAO PEQ;;;NATURAL

Select

Return

Current system parameters

94 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)

4 Press

l / h repeatedly to select the

desired memory number (“MEMORY1” to

“MEMORY6”).

• If system settings are already stored in the selected

memory number, the stored system parameter settings

appear in the menu screen. “EMPTY” appears in the menu

screen if no system settings are stored in the selected

memory number.

• If system settings are already saved in the selected

memory number, this unit overwrite the old system

settings.

• If you save the system settings to “MEMORY1” to

“MEMORY4”, you can load the stored settings by

pressing the corresponding

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons (see page 94).

5 Press

ENTER to save the current system

settings to the selected memory number.

6 Press

SET MENU again to exit from “SET

MENU”.

■ Loading by the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can recall the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”

to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding

SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

1 Press one of the

SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control to select the

desired memory number.

“MEMORY 1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front

panel display.

“EMPTY” appears in the menu screen if no system settings

are stored in the selected memory number.

2 Press the selected

SYSTEM MEMORY

button once more to confirm the selection.

This unit loads the settings stored in the selected

memory number.

■ Loading by the SET MENU operation

1 Press

SET MENU on the remote control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and

then press

ENTER.

The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears in the

OSD.

3 Press

ENTER to select “LOAD”.

The following menu appears in the OSD.

4 Press

l / h repeatedly to select the

desired memory number where the system

settings are stored and then press

ENTER.

This unit loads the selected system settings.

5 Press

SET MENU to exit from “SET

MENU”.

Loading the stored system settings

• Before performing the following operations, set the

operation mode selector on the remote control to

AMP.

• This unit overwrites the stored settings to the current

settings of this unit. If you do not want to erase the current

settings, save the current settings to any SYSTEM

MEMORY number in advance.

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

SAVE;;;;;;;MEMORY1

Drama

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;GEQ

YPAO PEQ;;;;;;NONE

Select

Return

Stored system parameters in the

selected memory number

SYSTEM MEMORY

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

LOAD;;;;;;;CURRENT

Church in Freiburg

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ

YPAO PEQ;;;NATURAL

Select

Return

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

LOAD;;;;;;;MEMORY6

Straight

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ

YPAO PEQ;;;;;;FLAT

Select

Load

95 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the

automatic setup and manual setup

This unit is equipped with three types of parametric

equalizer settings (see page 40), and you can also make

your customized configuration of the sound settings of this

unit by using the “MANUAL SETUP” parameters (see

page 72). To compare the results of the automatic setup or

your manual configuration, use the MSYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

Carry out the following procedure when all the parameters are set

to default values.

1 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current settings of this unit to

“MEMORY1”.

2 Perform the automatic setup.

Set “EQ” to “NATURAL”. See page 40 for details.

3 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

performed in step 2 to “MEMORY2”.

4 Perform the automatic setup again.

This time, set “EQ” to “FRONT”.

5 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 3 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

performed in step 4 to “MEMORY3”.

■ Example 2: Switching the settings for

different room environments

The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary

depending on the situations of the room (for example,

whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings

of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the

room. You can switch between the settings of this unit

easily by using MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

1 Close the curtains of the listening room and

then perform the automatic setup.

See page 37 for details of the automatic setup.

2 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the settings for the current room

situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to

“MEMORY1”.

3 Open the curtains of the listening room and

the perform the automatic setup.

4 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the

curtains are open) to “MEMORY2”.

Using examples

Note

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The current settings of this unit

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The results of the automatic setup

(EQ: NATURAL)

SYSTEM MEMORY 3

The results of the automatic setup

(EQ: FRONT)

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The settings when the curtains of the

listening room are closed

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The settings when the curtains of

the listening room are open

96 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)

■ Example 3: Saving the sound

configurations for specific sources

The desired sound configurations are different for each

input source. For example, if you use the sound field

program “Village Vanguard” for a music source of a live

jazz performance, the parameter settings may differ when

the input source is a vinyl record or an SACD. You can

store the sound settings for each input source.

Saving each setting

See page 64 for the sound field program parameter settings.

1 Start playback of the desired live jazz

performance recorded on the SACD.

2 Set the sound field program to “Village

Vanguard” and then adjust the parameters

for the current playback sources.

3 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current sound field program

settings to “MEMORY1”.

4 Change the input source to “PHONO” and

then start playback of the desired live jazz

performance recorded on the vinyl record.

5 Adjust the sound field program parameters

for the current playback source.

6 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current sound field program

settings to “MEMORY2”.

■ Example 4: Switching multiple audio and

video synchronization settings

If you use two different kinds of video monitors or

projectors, and these components are not compatible with

the automatic audio and video synchronization feature,

you should set “MANUAL DELAY” for each component.

You can switch between the different “MANUAL

DELAY” settings by using the MSYSTEM MEMORY

buttons.

Saving each setting

In the following example, the LCD video monitor and one input

component (for example, VCR) are connected to the S VIDEO

input jack and S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, and the video

projector and the other input component (for example, DVD

player) are connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and HDMI

OUT jack.

1 Start playback of the desired video source on

the connected LCD video monitor and then

adjust “MANUAL DELAY” in “SOUND MENU”

appropriately (see page 84).

2 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the audio and video synchronization

settings for the LCD video monitor to “MEMORY

1”.

3 Change the input source to the component

connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and

then start playback.

4 Adjust “MANUAL DELAY” in “SOUND MENU”

appropriately.

5 Press and hold

SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the audio and video synchronization

settings for the video projector to “MEMORY 2”.

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The “Village Vanguard” program configured

for the SACD sources

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The “Village Vanguard” program configured for

the vinyl record sources

Note

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The settings for the LCD video monitor

connected to the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The settings for the video projector connected

to the HDMI OUT jack

97 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 99).

■ Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP to control this

unit.

*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component

operation mode selector is set to

AMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the operation mode selector to

TV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO in advance

(see page 99). When you set the remote control codes for

both DTV and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for

DTV.

*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to

TV. For details, see the “TV” column on

page 98.

Remote control features

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

A/B/C/D/E

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START

ENHANCERSTEREO

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

Set to AMP

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER Turns on or off the power.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

A/B/C/D/E

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START

ENHANCERSTEREO

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

Set to TV

98 En

Remote control features

■ Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons

(1) or . You must set the appropriate remote control

code for each input source in advance (see page 99). The

following table shows the function of each control button

used to control other components assigned to each input

selector button (1) or . Be advised that some buttons

may not correctly operate the selected component.

The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 14

different components.

*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button.

*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see

page 99).

*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column.

–

––

ENTER

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

MD/TAPE

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

A/B/C/D/E

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

FREQ/TEXT EON

MODE – PTY SEEK – START

ENHANCERSTEREO

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

Set to SOURCE

Blu-ray Disc/

HD DVD

player/

recorder

DVD player/

DVD

recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite

tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner

[1] AV POWER

Power

DVR power

Power

[2] CH + TV

channel up

Channel up Channel up Channel up

channel up

CH –

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

Channel down Channel down Channel down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

TV channel

down

[3] TITLE Title Title Title Title Title Band

[4] ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu select Menu select

PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up Menu up

Preset up

(1 to 8)

PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down Menu down

Preset down

(1 to 8)

A/B/C/D/E l Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left

Preset down

(A to E)

A/B/C/D/E h Menu right Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B

Preset up

(A to E)

[5] RETURN Return Return Return Return Return

[6] 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

[7] ll

backward

DVR search

backward

DVR search

backward

forward

DVR search

forward

DVR search

forward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Direction

back

a Skip forward Skip forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

REC/

DISC SKIP

Rec

(recorder)

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

DVR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop Stop

DVR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause Pause

DVR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

p Play Play Play

DVR play

Play Play Play Play

[8] MENU Menu Menu Menu Menu

[9] AUDIO Audio Audio Audio

[10] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

[11] ENT Enter Enter/recall Enter

Notes

99 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting a component to be controlled

You can select a component to be controlled

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons (1).

Press

SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the

desired component.

The name of the component to be controlled appears in the

display window (A) on the remote control.

■ Controlling optional components

(Option mode)

“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be

programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for

programming commands that are to be used only as a part

of a macro function or for components that do not have a

valid remote control code.

To select the option mode, press

SELECT n

repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display

window on the remote control.

You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See

page 101 to program buttons operated within this component

control area.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a

Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

Note

SELECT

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

TAPE — 2700

TUNER Yamaha 2607

TUNER TUNER Yamaha 2602

CD CD Yamaha 2300

CD-R CD-R Yamaha 2400

MULTI CH

DVD Yamaha 2100

MD/TAPE MD Yamaha 2500

DVD DVD Yamaha 2100

BD/HD DVD DVD Yamaha 2100

PHONO TV — —

DTV/CBL TV — —

DVR DVR Yamaha 2807

VCR VCR — —

V-AU X/

DOCK

TUNER Yamaha 2606

Note

100 En

Remote control features

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

), or to select the input area

you want to set up.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

The library name (e.g. L;DVD) and the name of the

selected input area (e.g. DVD) appear alternately in

the display window (A) on the remote control.

• You can set a remote control code of a different type of

component to an input area. Press 3l / h repeatedly to

change the library (component category).

Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,

L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),

L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),

L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR

• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input

selector button (1) or , or press

SELECT k / n

repeatedly to select the input area.

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window (A).

“0000” appears in the display window (A) if no code has

been set.

4 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the

component you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of

this manual.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control if setting is successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control if the setting is unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button (1) or , or

ASELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then

repeat steps 2 through 5.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

7 Press

p (play) or AV POWER to confirm

whether you can control your component

using the remote control.

If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your

component has more than one code, try each of them until

you find the correct one.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the learn feature (see “Programming

codes from other remote controls” on page 101) or use the

remote control supplied with the component.

• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

Notes

Note

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

SOURCE

AMP

LEARN

Notes

ENT

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

ENHANCERSTEREO

LEARN

POWER

101 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program the function of

other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas

in the following illustration. The buttons can be

programmed independently for each input area.

The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most

of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some

special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the

operating instructions for the other remote control.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

) or to select an input area.

Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to

SOURCE.

When you set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the

programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this

unit.

2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

3 Press

LEARN using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area

(e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display

window (A) on the remote control.

• Do not press and hold

LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.

4 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control.

Programming codes from other

remote controls

Note

–

––

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

ENT

RETURN

VOLUME

TV VOL

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

MD/TAPE

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE

–

PTY SEEK

–

START

ENHANCERSTEREO

Set to

SOURCE

Notes

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

Other remote control

LEARN

102 En

Remote control features

5 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window (A) on

the remote control.

“NG” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 4.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4

and 5.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press

SELECT k / n to select the

component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– when the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

You can change the name of the input source that appears

in the display window (A) on the remote control if you

want to use a different name from the factory preset. This

feature is useful when you have set an input area to control

a different component.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

), or to select the input area

you want to rename.

The name of the selected input area appears in the

display window (A).

2 Press

RENAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 2.

Notes

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

Other remote control

LEARN

Changing source names in the

display window

Note

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

RENAME

103 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

3 Press

k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing

n changes the character as follows:

A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),

/ (slash), and space.

Pressing

k changes the characters in reverse order.

4 Press

h to move the cursor to the next

position.

Press

l to move the cursor to the previous position.

5 Press

ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control if renaming was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to rename another input area, press

the input selector button (

) or , or press

SELECT k /

n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3

through 5.

6 Press

RENAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

The macro programming feature makes it possible to

perform a series of operations with the press of a single

button. For example, when you want to play a CD,

normally you would turn on the components, select the

CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The

macro programming feature lets you perform all of these

operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The

buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 105).

■ MACRO operations

1 Set the

MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.

2 Press the desired macro button.

3 Set the

MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF

when you finish to using the macro

programming operation.

• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does

not accept any other operation until it has completed running

the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

Note

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

RENAME

Macro programming features

Notes

ENT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO

MD/TAPE

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START

MACRO

MACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

104 En

Remote control features

■ Default macro functions

*1 You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.

*2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 99), you can turn on the power of

your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.

*3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

*4 Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, Blu-ray

Disc player, HD DVD player or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play

button on the input area of that component (see page 101) or set a remote control code (see page 99) in advance.

Pressing

macro button

To automatically transmit these signals in order

First Second Third

—

(*1)

—

(CD area) (*4)

(CD-R area) (*4)

—

(MD/TAPE area) (*4)

(DVD area) (*4)

(BD/HD DVD area) (*4)

—

(DVR area) (*4)

(VCR area) (*4)

—

STANDBY STANDBY

POWER

(*1)

POWER

(*2)

POWER

TUNER

POWER

TUNER

(*3)

CD CD

CD-R CD-R

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

MD/TAP

DVD DVD

BD/HD DV

PHONO PHONO

DTV/CBL DTV/CBL

DVR DVR

VCR VCR

V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK

105 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macro and use the macro

programming feature to transmit several remote control

commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to

set up remote control codes or perform learning operations

before programming the macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

• We do not recommend programming continuous operations

such as volume control in a macro.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

MACRO using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press the

MACRO button you want to use

to operate the macro.

The macro button name (e.g. “M;DVD”) and the

selected component name (e.g. “DVD”) appear

alternately in the display window (A) on the remote

control.

“AGAIN” appears in the display window (A) if you press a

button other than a macro button.

3 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode.

Example:

Set the input source to DVD

→ Activate the DVD

player → Set the sleep timer

Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD.

Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER.

Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP.

To change the selected input area, press

SELECT k / n.

Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,

whereas

SELECT k / n only changes the selected input

area.

4 Press

MACRO again using a ballpoint pen

or similar object when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Note

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

POWER

STANDBY

Note

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

106 En

Remote control features

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names

and setup remote control codes.

■ Clearing function sets

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

CLEAR by

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“CLEAR” appears in the display window (A).

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press

k / n to select the clear mode.

L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)

Clears all learned functions in the respective

input area. The name of a component is shown

after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector

button to select the input area.

L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the

amplifier functions of this unit.

L;ALL Clears all learned functions.

M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the

remote to the factory settings.

3 Press and hold

CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“WAIT” appears in the display window (A). If

clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the

display window (A) on the remote control.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting if you have set remote control codes).

• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to

complete.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) if clearing

was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press

a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

4 Press LCLEAR again to exit.

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

), or to select the input area

containing the function you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

Clearing configurations

Note

CLEAR

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

Notes

CLEAR

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

107 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

2 Press

LEARN using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name

(e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display

window.

• Do not press and hold

LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press and hold

CLEAR using a ballpoint

pen or similar object and then press the

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window (A) if

clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the

display window on the remote control, release the

ballpoint pen or similar object used to press

CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote

control returns to the learning mode.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 4.

• If you continuously want to clear another function for

another component, press

SELECT k / n to select the

input area, then repeat step 3.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

4 Press

LEARN again to exit.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

MACRO using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press and hold

CLEAR using a ballpoint

pen or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window (A) on the

remote control if clearing was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 2.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

3 Press

MACRO again to exit the macro

programming mode.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control if you press more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

LEARN

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MODE – PTY SEEK – START

Note

Notes

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

108 En

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this

unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2) and third zone (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third zone using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in Zone 2 and/or Zone 3.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in

Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 to the main zone (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3.

• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

■ Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT jacks and select “EXT” in

“AMP” (see page 91).

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the Zone 2/Zone 3 when “VOLUME” are set to “FIX” (see page 92).

Using multi-zone configuration

Connect the source component to the analog audio input jacks of this unit to play back the source in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

This unit does not output the audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT and HDMI jacks to the ZONE OUT jacks.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

Notes

OUTOUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

Yamaha

component

Yamaha

component

Infrared signal

receiver

MAIN

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Infrared signal

emitter

DVD player etc.

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Third zone

(Zone 3)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 3) jacks

To the REMOTE IN jack

To the REMOTE IN jackFrom the REMOTE OUT jack

Analog audio signals only

109 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “[SP1]” or “[SP2]”

for “AMP” (see page 91).

If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “BOTH” for “AMP”

(see page 91).

You can select the zone you want to control by using the

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.

■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3

Front panel operations

1 Press

ZONE 2 ON/OFF or

ZONE 3

ON/OFF on the front panel to individually

turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3.

2 Press

ZONE CONTROLS on the front

panel repeatedly to select the zone you want

to control.

Each time you press

ZONE CONTROLS, the

front panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator

flashes when the main zone is selected.

ZONE2

Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.

ZONE3

Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.

Important safety notice

The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

–

SP2

SINGLE

–

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

–

Third zone

(Zone 3)

This unit

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3

ZONE2

ZONE3

No indicator flashes

when the main zone is selected.

110 En

Using multi-zone configuration

• You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,

the currently selected zone mode is automatically

canceled. In this case, press

ZONE CONTROLS

again.

• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3

are turned on.

3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone

2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of

Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of

the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or

“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3” on page 111 to perform further

operations.

Remote control operations

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SELECT k repeatedly to

select the zone you want to control.

“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window (A) on the remote control.

2 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone

2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of

Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of

the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or

“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3” on page 111 to perform further

operations.

3 Press

SELECT k / n to exit from the

Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3

using the remote control

POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control

work differently depending on the selected zone that

appears in the display window (A) on the remote control.

• When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is

selected, you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or

Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually.

• When the all mode is selected, pressing

POWER

turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3

simultaneously and pressing

STANDBY sets them

to the standby mode simultaneously.

• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”

appears for a few seconds when

POWER or

STANDBY

is pressed.

• “ALL” appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control only when

SELECT n is pressed.

SELECT

SOURCE

AMP

Control mode

Display window

(A)

POWER

and

STANDBY

Main zone

mode

Name of the selected

input area

Turns on the main

zone only or sets it to

the standby mode.

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE 2” or “2;name

of the selected input

area”

Turns on Zone 2 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

Zone 3 mode

“ZONE 3” or “3;name

of the selected input

area”

Turns on Zone 3 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

All mode

“ALL”

POWER: turns on

the main zone, Zone

2 and Zone 3.

STANDBY: sets

the main zone, Zone

2 and Zone 3 to the

standby mode.

Notes

111 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press one of the input selector buttons

on the remote control) to select the input source

of the selected zone.

If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:

name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the

selected input source” is displayed in the display window

(A) on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

selected respectively.

• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the FM/AM

tuning features in the selected zone. For details about

the FM/AM tuning operations, see “FM/AM tuning”

on page 54.

• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to play back the

sources in the iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10 sold separately) in

the selected zone. You can only control iPod in the

simple remote mode (see page 61).

The input sources are shared across all zones. You cannot select

the same input source in multiple zones simultaneously.

You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected

zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently

selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press

ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again.

■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate

VOLUME on the front panel (or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust

the volume level of the selected zone.

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to

the selected zone.

When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,

VOLUME +/– can be used only when “VOLUME” is set to

“VAR” in “ZONE SET” (see page 92).

■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker

level in Zone 2 or Zone 3

Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

“BALANCE” and then rotate

PROGRAM on

the front panel to adjust the balance of the front

left and right speaker level of the selected zone.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press CH +/– on the remote control to

adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency

response (BASS) respectively.

You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using

TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see

“Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 52.

Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window (A) of the remote control before you adjust the tonal

quality of the corresponding zone (see page 110).

Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2

or Zone 3 operation mode.

Note

–

TV VOL

–

SOURCE

AMP

TREBLE

BASS

112 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Using Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control

(except Europe model)

You can control Zone 2 or Zone 3 features by using the supplied Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. First, set the ID1/ID2

switch and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch appropriately.

Controlling the amplifier function

1 Input selector buttons

Selects the desired input source for the controlling zone.

4 ID1/ID2 switch

Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see

page 114).

5 POWER

Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.

This button is operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF on

the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

6 STANDBY

Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.

This button is operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF on

the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

7 VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone

8 MUTE

Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to

restore the audio output to the previous volume level.

9 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch

Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that

of Zone 3.

Controlling the tuner function (see page 54)

2 PRESET k / n

Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when

the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see

page 56).

3 A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see

page 55).

Note

TUNER

CD-R

MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD

PHONO

DTV/CBL

VCR

V-AUX/DOCK

DVR

POWER

STANDBY

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ID2

ID1

MUTE

Note

Select “TUNER” as the input source of the controlling zone

to use the following functions

113 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• The settings you make are reflected next time you press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see

page 33).

• Only

MASTER ON/OFF,

STRAIGHT and the

PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup

menu.

• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2 Press and hold

STRAIGHT and then

press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED MENU”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select

the parameter you want to adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to change

the selected parameter setting.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN

•Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .

• Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .

■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the

front panel of this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” if you want to activate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

We recommend that you set the parameter to “ON” in most cases.

Advanced setup

Notes

Using the advanced setup menu

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

SPEAKER

IMP.

Speaker Impedance level

8Ω MIN

Front

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

6Ω MIN

Front

The impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

Note

114 En

Advanced setup

■ RS-232C access on the standby mode

RS-232C STANDBY

Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-

232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.

Choices: YES, NO

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES

[Other models]: NO

• Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

• Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

■ Remote control AMP ID

RC AMP ID

Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote

control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “2001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “2002”.

Setting remote control AMP ID code

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object and then press

l / h repeatedly

until “L;AMP” appears in the display window

(A) on the remote control.

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window(A) on the remote

control.

4 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

four-digit remote control AMP ID code for the

input area you want to use.

*1 The remote control setting.

*2 The setting of this unit.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (A) if the

setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (A) if the

setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

■ Remote control TUNER ID

RC TUNER ID

Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for

remote control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “2602”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “2603”.

See page 113 for the operation of the advanced setup menu.

Notes

LEARN

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

Remote

control AMP

ID code

Function

RC AMP ID

2001

(initial setting)

Operates this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2002

Operates this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

LEARN

115 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Setting remote control TUNER ID

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

TUNER on the

remote control to select the tuner to change

the remote control ID.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object until “L;TUN” and “TUNER”

alternately appear in the display window (A).

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window (A) on the remote

control.

4 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the input

area you want to use.

*1 The remote control setting.

*2 The setting of this unit.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (A) if the

setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (A) if the

setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

LEARN

3 seconds

Remote

control

TUNER ID

code

Function

RC TUNER

2602

(initial setting)

Operates this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2603

Operates this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

LEARN

116 En

Advanced setup

■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South

America.

• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.

■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier

function (see page 19).

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier

function.

• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier

function.

When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK

terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in

that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the

bi-amplifier connection (see page 19).

■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE

Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the

initial factory settings. You can select the category of

parameters to be initialized.

Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL

• Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters

of the sound field parameters (see page 64).

• Select “VIDEO” to initialize the parameters in

“VIDEO SET” (see page 89) and “OSD SHIFT” (see

page 88) and “GRAY BACK” in “DISPLAY SET” (see

page 88).

• Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this

unit.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization

procedure.

• The advanced setup menu parameters are not initialized.

• Use “INITIALIZE” in the sound field program menu to

initialize the parameters of the desired program (see page 64).

■ HDMI video monitor check

MONITOR CHECK

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check

function of this unit. When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to

“YES”, this unit receives the information of the available

video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected

via HDMI and you can only select the resolutions

supported by the video monitor in “HDMI SCALING”

(see page 89). When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to

“SKIP”, you can select nay resolution in

“HDMI SCALING”.

Choices: YES, SKIP

See page 113 for the operation of the advanced setup menu.

Note

Notes

TROUBLESHOOTING

117 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire

for each connection does not touch anything other

than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

or strong static electricity).

Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it

back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

24-31

Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,

“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG” while the input source

component outputs digital audio signals.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or

“COAX/OPT”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the

INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector

buttons (

) on the remote control).

42, 43

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted.

Press

MUTE or

VOLUME +/– on the remote

control to resume audio output and then adjust the

volume.

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”

and “HDMI” audio signals are not being

played back on this unit.

Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V1800” in “SET

MENU”.

No picture. The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your

source components in the same way as you connect

your video monitor to this unit.

This unit outputs the video signals are not

supported on the video monitor connected

to the HDMI OUT jack.

Set the “INITIALIZE” to “VIDEO” to reset the video

parameters.

116

Set “MON.CHK” to “YES”.

116

Pure Direct mode is active. Turn off the Pure Direct mode.

Non-standard video signals are input.

118 En

Troubleshooting

Short message

displays do not

appear on the video

monitor.

“SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”. Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”.

“GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”. Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”.

“VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF”. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

The signals input at the HDMI input jacks

are being output at the HDMI OUT jack.

Video signals in the progressive format or

HDTV video signals are being input.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.

33, 113

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted.

Press

MUTE or

VOLUME +/– on the remote

control to resume audio output.

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER

LEVEL”.

Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound is heard

from the presence

speakers.

The sound field programs are turned off.

Press

STRAIGHT to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press

STRAIGHT on the front panel so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

Speakers are connected to the

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND

speaker terminals.

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2-

channel source is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.

The source does not contain low-

frequency signals.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is

automatically set to “NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting

other than “NONE”.

“SUR.B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set

to “NONE”.

Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

119 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format. (Desired input

source indicator or

decoder indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output the desired digital audio signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while a record is

being played.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-

head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

Turn on the power of the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

25, 28

Some components cannot record Dolby

Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT (REC)

jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”

is set to “ON”.

Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

120 En

Troubleshooting

■ Tuner

■ HDMI

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not

connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even

if you use an outdoor antenna.

Noises can result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.

—

HDMI ERROR Cause Remedy

See

page

DEVICE OVER

The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP ERROR

HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

HDMI MESSAGE Cause Remedy

See

page

Out of

Resolution

The connected video monitor is not

compatible with the resolution of the input

video signal.

Set the resolution of the video output signal of the

input source component appropriately.

—

121 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

The operation mode selector is set

incorrectly.

Set the operation mode selector correctly. When

operating this unit, set it to the

AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the

SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO

area, set it to the

TV position.

—

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

The library code of the remote control and

the remote control ID of this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the

corresponding remote control library code.

100, 114

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

101

The remote control

does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

101

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

106

122 En

Troubleshooting

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection of your iPod

(see page 31).

■ AUTO SETUP

Before AUTO SETUP

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod.

—

Unknown type The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the

YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this

unit is complete.

Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod.

—

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.

—

123 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

During AUTO SETUP

After AUTO SETUP

• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.

• If warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal.

• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.

• If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 16

E-2:NO SUR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 16

E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 16

E-4:SBR.SBL Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the

SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker

terminal if you only have one surround

back speaker.

E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet

environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the

optimizer microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use

surround back speakers.

E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 37

Check the speaker connections and

placement.

E-9:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was

cancelled due to user activity.

Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 37

E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 37

Warning message Cause Remedy

See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper

polarity (+ or –).

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening

position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Readjust the speaker installation so that all

speakers are set in locations with similar

conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections. 16

Use speakers of similar quality.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 37

Notes

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

124 En

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup

menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position.

1 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2 Press and hold

STRAIGHT and then

press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“INITIALIZE”.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“ALL”.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

• You can initialize the video parameters or sound field

program parameters separately. See page 116 for details.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to confirm your

selection and turn off this unit.

Resetting the system

Notes

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

INITIALIZE

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

ALL

GLOSSARY

125 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Audio and video synchronization

(lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a

technical term that involves both a problem and a

capability of maintaining audio and video signals

synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex

end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an

automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows

devices to perform this synchronization automatically and

accurately without user interaction.

■ Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a

speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section

of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the

combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement

each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.

This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much

simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence

the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high

pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes

frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above

the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes

frequencies above its cutoff.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and P

R signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A

monitor with component input jacks is required in order to

output component signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in

displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of

the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows

HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to

billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding

for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between

colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many

times more shades of gray between black and white. Also

Deep Color increases the number of available colors

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color

space.

■ Dialogue normalization

Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or

DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same

average listening level so that the user does not have to

change the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS

programs.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system

has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to

minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels

and the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented

excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound

environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel

configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

Glossary

126 En

Glossary

■ Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology

developed for high-definition programming and media

including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc.

Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and

as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete

channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby

Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and

designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/

amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie

sources and “Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”

for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for

2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game

sources.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is

widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,

and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby

Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the

volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects

and directionality.

■ Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including

HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory

audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio

standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound

that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a

high-definition home theater experience. Supporting

bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the

future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with

the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the

metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog

normalization and dynamic range control.

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio

signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio

CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at

a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while

noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce

distortion, a common occurrence with very high

quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling

rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered

by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original

96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-

quality full-motion video for music programs and motion

picture soundtracks on DVD video.

127 En

Glossary

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a

home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital

surround in your home. This system produces practically

distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and

right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1

(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit

incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the

existing 5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Express

DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the

optional feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which

offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for

network streaming, and Internet applications. DTS

Express is used for the Secondary Audio feature of Blu-

ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These

features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the

additional commentaries made by the director of a film)

on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express

signals are mixed down with the main audio stream on the

player component, and the component sends the mixed

audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital

coaxial, digital optical, or analog connections.

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution

audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based

media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as

an optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually

indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-

definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up

to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the

future, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based

media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a

mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit

identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition

home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0

Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,

DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete

channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers of the future, DTS-

HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS

Digital Surround.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such

as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video

monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI

transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-

channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators. For further

information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The

frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There

are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources

and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

128 En

Glossary

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code

Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can

be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,

while the dynamic range representing the sound level

difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.

In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider

the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the

higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the

sound level can be reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

129 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field in addition to the

direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s

instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any

size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is

exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field

processor.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your

own home by using the Yamaha original sound field

technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■ SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm

that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects

even without any surround speakers by using virtual

surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual

CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that

does not include a center speaker.

■ Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit

enhances your listening experience by regenerating the

missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,

flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency

fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass is compensated, providing improved

performance of the overall sound system.

■ Sound output from each speaker

Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of

audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the

table below to understand the speaker layout for each

sound field program. For details about the sound output

from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to

“Sound output in each sound field program” in

“APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.

Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from

speakers depending on the type of input source being played

back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be

used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of

movies, such as special sound effects, etc.

Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you

can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back

speakers (see page 46).

Sound field program information

Note

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

130 En

This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency

characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your

listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the

following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor)

to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency

characteristics.

■ Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■ Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

Parametric equalizer information

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

131 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 160/195/255/335 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)

[Asia, General, China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 175 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 180 W

• Dynamic Headroom

8 Ω ...................................................................................... 0.9 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 130 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω

PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to OUT (REC)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more

[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened)

to Front L/R .............................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)

BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz

• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Format (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL

• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)

.................................................................................... 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

Specifications

132 En

Specifications

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General and Asia models]

....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less

[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]

6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W

•AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)

[U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)

[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm

(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 17-1/4 in)

• Weight ........................................................... 17.0 kg (37 lbs. 8 oz.)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

133 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Numerics

1 BASIC MENU, Manual setup .......... 72

2 VOLUME MENU, Manual setup ..... 73

2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 50

2ch Stereo DIRECT,

Sound field parameter ...................... 69

2ch Stereo, Sound field programs ........ 50

2-channel stereo direct, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 69

3 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 74

3 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 73

4 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 74

7ch Enhancer EFFECT LEVEL .......... 69

7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 50

7ch Stereo CT LEVEL, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 69

7ch Stereo PL LEVEL, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 69

7ch Stereo PR LEVEL, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 69

7ch Stereo SB LEVEL, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 69

7ch Stereo SL LEVEL, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 69

7ch Stereo SR LEVEL, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 69

7ch Stereo, Sound field programs ........ 50

7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer

effect level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 69

7-channel stereo center speaker level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 69

7-channel stereo presence left speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 69

7-channel stereo presence right speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 69

7-channel stereo surround back speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 69

7-channel stereo surround left speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 69

7-channel stereo surround right speaker

level, Sound field parameter ............ 69

96/24 indicator ..................................... 34

■ A

A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 88

A)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............. 82

A)SPEAKER SET, Basic menu ........... 77

AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 32

Action Game,

Sound field programs ....................... 48

Advanced setup .................................. 113

Advanced sound configurations ........... 64

Adventure, Sound field programs ........ 50

AFFAIRS, Radio Data System

program type .................................... 59

AM antenna connection ....................... 32

AM tuning ............................................ 54

AMP, Operation mode selector ........... 36

Audio and video synchronization,

Sound menu .....................................84

Audio cable plugs .................................20

Audio components connection .............28

Audio information ................................44

Audio input jacks selection ..................43

AUDIO jacks ........................................20

Audio jacks ...........................................20

AUDIO SELECT .................................43

AUDIO SELECT,

Initial configuration .........................91

Audio select, Initial configuration ........91

Audio settings, Sound menu ................84

Audio signal flow .................................23

AUTO DELAY, Lip sync ....................84

Auto delay, Lip sync ............................84

AUTO indicator ...................................35

AUTO SETUP .....................................37

AUTO setup .........................................72

Auto setup ............................................72

Automatic preset tuning,

FM/AM tuning .................................55

Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning .......54

Available decoders with sound field

programs ..........................................71

■ B

B)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu ...............83

B)SP LEVEL, Basic menu ...................79

BASIC MENU, Manual setup ..............77

Basic menu, Manual setup ...................72

Bass cross over, Speaker settings .........78

Battery charge indicator .......................34

BI-AMP, Advanced setup ..................116

Bi-amplifier setting,

Advanced setup ..............................116

Blu-ray Disc player connection ............25

■ C

C)DYNAMIC RANGE,

Sound menu .....................................83

C)MEMORY GUARD,

Option menu .....................................90

C)SP DISTANCE, Basic menu ............80

C.IMAGE, Decoder parameter ............71

Cable plugs ...........................................20

CD player connection ...........................28

CD recorder connection .......................28

Cellar Club,

Sound field programs .......................48

CENTER PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................29

CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............77

Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........77

CENTER WIDTH,

Decoder parameter ...........................71

Chamber, Sound field programs ..........47

Charge on standby, Dock set ................87

Church in Freiburg,

sound field programs ........................47

CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 35

CLASSICAL,

Sound field programs ...................... 47

CLASSICS, Radio Data System

program type ................................... 59

Clock time, Radio Data System

information ...................................... 58

COMPONENT I/P,

Display settings ............................... 89

Component interlace/progressive up-

conversion, Display settings ............ 89

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .............. 20

Compressed Music Enhancer .............. 50

Connection, AM antenna ..................... 32

Connection, Audio components .......... 28

Connection, Blu-ray Disc player ......... 25

Connection, CD player ........................ 28

Connection, CD recorder ..................... 28

Connection,

CENTER PRE OUT jack ................ 29

Connection, DVD player ..................... 26

Connection, DVD recorder .................. 27

Connection, External amplifier ........... 29

Connection, External decoder ............. 30

Connection, FM antenna ..................... 32

Connection,

FRONT PRE OUT jack ................... 29

Connection, HD DVD player .............. 25

Connection, iPod ................................. 31

Connection, MD recorder .................... 28

Connection, Multi-format player ......... 30

Connection, Power cable ..................... 32

Connection, projector .......................... 24

Connection, PVR ................................. 27

Connection, Set-top box ...................... 27

Connection,

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ....... 29

Connection, SUR.BACK/PRESENCE

PRE OUT jack ................................. 29

Connection,

SURROUND PRE OUT jack .......... 29

Connection, turntable .......................... 28

Connection, TV monitor ...................... 24

Connection, VCR ................................ 27

CROSS OVER, Speaker settings ........ 78

CT, Radio Data System

information ...................................... 58

CULTURE, Radio Data System

program type ................................... 59

■ D

D)INIT. CONFIG ................................ 91

D)LIPSYNC, Sound menu .................. 84

D)TEST TONE, Basic menu ............... 80

Decoder descriptions ........................... 70

Decoder indicators ............................... 35

DECODER MODE,

Initial configuration ......................... 91

Decoder mode,

Initial configuration ......................... 91

Index

134 En

DECODER MODE, Input menu ......... 86

Decoder mode, Input menu .................. 86

DIALG.LIFT,

Sound field parameter ...................... 65

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 20

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 20

DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ...... 71

DIMMER, Display settings ................. 88

Dimmer, Display settings .................... 88

Display settings, Option menu ............. 88

DIST, Auto setup parameter ................ 38

DRAMA, Radio Data System program

type .................................................. 59

Drama, Sound field programs .............. 50

DSP indicators ..................................... 35

DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter ... 65

DVD player connection ....................... 26

DVD recorder connection .................... 27

Dynamic range, Sound menu ............... 83

■ E

E)AUDIO SET, Sound menu ............... 84

E)ZONE SET, Option menu ................ 91

EDUCATE, Radio Data System program

type .................................................. 59

Effect sound level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 65

Enhanced other networks data service,

Radio Data System tuning ............... 60

ENHANCER indicator ........................ 35

ENTERTAINMENT, Sound field

programs .......................................... 48

EON data service, Radio Data System

tuning ............................................... 60

EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............ 82

EQ, Auto setup parameter .................... 40

Equalizer type select, Equalizer ........... 82

Equalizer, Sound menu ........................ 82

EXTD SUR., Initial configuration ....... 91

EXTD SUR., Sound menu ................... 84

Extended surround,

Initial configuration ......................... 91

Extended Surround, Sound menu ........ 84

External amplifier connection .............. 29

External decoder connection ................ 30

■ F

F)HDMI SET, Sound menu ................. 85

FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 89

FM antenna connection ........................ 32

FM tuning ............................................ 54

Front input,

Multi channel input Setup ............... 87

Front panel display scroll,

Display settings ............................... 89

Front panel door ................................... 36

FRONT PRE OUT connection ............ 29

FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 77

Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 77

FRONT, Multi channel input Setup ..... 87

■ G

GEQ, Equalizer .................................... 82

Graphic equalizer, Equalizer ................ 82

GRAY BACK, Display settings ...........88

Gray back, Display settings .................88

■ H

Hall in Amsterdam,

Sound field programs .......................47

Hall in Munich,

Sound field programs .......................47

Hall in Vienna,

Sound field programs .......................47

HD DVD player connection .................25

HDMI ...................................................21

HDMI ASPECT ...................................90

HDMI aspect ratio ................................90

HDMI AUTO, Lip sync .......................84

HDMI auto, Lip sync ...........................84

HDMI indicator ....................................34

HDMI set, Sound menu .......................85

HDMI video monitor,

Advanced setup ..............................116

HEADPHONE, Dynamic range ...........83

HEADPHONE,

Low frequency effect level ..............83

Headphones ..........................................43

Headphones indicator ...........................35

Headphones using ................................43

Headphones, Dynamic range ...............83

Headphones,

Low frequency effect level ..............83

HiFi DSP indicator ...............................35

■ I

I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu .........86

INFO, Radio Data System

program type ....................................59

Infrared window ...................................36

INI.VOL., Audio settings .....................81

INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......66

Initial configuration, Option menu .......91

Initial delay,

Sound field parameter ......................66

Initial volume, Audio settings ..............81

INITIALIZE, Advanced setup ...........116

INPUT CH, Multi channel

input Setup .......................................87

Input channel

and speaker indicators ......................34

Input channel indicators .......................34

Input channels,

Multi channel input Setup ................87

INPUT MENU, Manual setup .............85

Input menu, Manual setup ....................74

INPUT RENAME, Input menu ............86

Input rename, Input menu ....................86

Input signal indicators ..........................35

Input source indicators .........................34

Input sources information display ........44

Input/output assignment,

Input menu .......................................86

iPod connection ....................................31

iPod controlling ....................................61

iPod using .............................................61

■ J

Jacks .....................................................20

■ L

LEVEL, Auto setup parameter .............40

LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......77

LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............77

LIGHT M, Radio Data System

program type ....................................59

Lip Sync, Sound menu .........................84

LIVE/CLUB,

Sound field programs .......................47

LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ......................67

Liveness, Sound field parameter ..........67

Low-frequency effect level,

Sound menu ......................................83

LVL, Auto setup parameter ..................38

■ M

M.O.R. M, Radio Data System

program type ....................................59

Macro programming,

remote control ................................105

MANUAL DELAY, Lip sync ..............84

Manual delay, Lip sync ........................84

Manual preset tuning,

FM/AM tuning .................................55

MANUAL SETUP ...............................72

Manual setup ........................................72

Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............54

MASTER ON/OFF ...............................33

MAX VOL., Audio settings .................81

Maximum volume ................................81

Maximum volume, Audio settings .......81

MD recorder connection .......................28

Memory guard, Option menu ...............90

MEMORY indicator .............................35

MON.CHK, Advanced setup ..............116

Mono Movie,

Sound field programs .......................50

MOVIE, Sound field programs ............49

MULTI CH INPUT

component selection .........................43

MULTI CH INPUT jacks .....................30

Multi-format player connection ............30

Multi-channel source playback

in 2-channel stereo ...........................53

Multi-channel sources playback with

headphones .......................................51

Multi-information display ....................34

MULTI-ZONE configuration,

Zone2, Zone3 .................................108

MUSIC ENHANCER, Sound field

category ............................................50

Music Video,

Sound field programs .......................49

MUTE ...................................................44

MUTE indicator ...................................34

Muting ..................................................44

■ N

Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type .........70, 71

Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ..................70

Index

135 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

NEWS, Radio Data System

program type .................................... 59

Number of speakers,

Auto setup parameter ....................... 38

■ O

ON SCREEN, Display settings ............ 88

On-screen display time,

Display settings ................................ 88

Operation mode selector ...................... 36

OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 37

Optimizer microphone ......................... 37

OPTION MENU, Manual setup .......... 88

Option menu, Manual setup ................. 74

OSD SHIFT, Display settings .............. 88

OSD shift, Display settings .................. 88

Other components controlling

by Remote control ........................... 98

Other components controlling,

Remote control ................................ 98

OTHER M, Radio Data System

program type .................................... 59

■ P

P.INIT.DLY,

Sound field parameter ...................... 66

P.ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ...................... 67

PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ...... 71

Parameter initialization,

Advanced setup .............................. 116

Parametric equalizer information ....... 130

Parametric equalizer type,

Auto setup parameter ....................... 40

PHONES jack ...................................... 43

PL II Game, Decoder type ................... 70

PL II Movie, Decoder type .................. 70

PL II Music, Decoder type ................... 70

Playback basic procedure ..................... 42

PLIIx Game, Decoder type .................. 70

PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ........... 70, 71

PLIIx Music, Decoder type .................. 70

POP M, Radio Data System

program type .................................... 59

Power cable connection ....................... 32

Presence initial delay, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 66

Presence room size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 67

PRESENCE SP, Speaker settings ........ 78

Presence speaker indicators ................. 34

Presence speakers, Speaker settings ....78

Presence/Surround back channel priority,

Speaker settings ............................... 79

Preset stations exchange,

FM/AM tuning ................................. 57

Preset stations selection ....................... 56

PRIORITY, Speaker settings ............... 79

PRO LOGIC, Decoder type ................. 70

Program service, Radio Data System

information ...................................... 58

Program type, Radio Data System

information ...................................... 58

Projector connection ............................ 24

PS, Radio Data System

information .......................................58

PTY SEEK mode, Radio Data System

tuning ...............................................59

PTY, Radio Data System

information .......................................58

PURE DIRECT ....................................52

Pure hi-fi sound ....................................52

PVR connection ...................................27

■ R

Radio Data System tuning ....................58

Radio text, Radio Data System

information .......................................58

RC AMP ID, Advanced setup ............114

RC TUNER ID, Advanced setup .......114

Recital/Opera,

Sound field programs .......................49

Remote control AMP ID,

Advanced setup ..............................114

Remote control code

default settings .................................99

Remote control codes settings ..............99

Remote control TUNER ID,

Advanced setup ..............................114

Remote control using ...........................36

REMOTE IN jack ................................31

REMOTE OUT jack ............................31

REMOTE SENSOR,

Advanced setup ..............................113

Remote sensor, Advanced setup ........113

Repeat, iPod playback ..........................62

Resetting the system ...........................124

REV.DELAY,

Sound field parameter ......................68

REV.LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ......................68

REV.TIME,

Sound field parameter ......................68

Reverberation delay, Sound field

parameter ..........................................68

Reverberation level, Sound field

parameter ..........................................68

Reverberation time,

Sound field parameter ......................68

ROCK M, Radio Data System program

type ...................................................59

Roleplaying Game,

Sound field programs .......................48

ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ......................67

Room size, Sound field parameter .......67

RS-232C STANDBY,

Advanced setup ..............................114

RT, Radio Data System

information .......................................58

■ S

S VIDEO jacks .....................................20

S.INIT.DLY,

Sound field parameter ......................66

S.LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ......................67

S.ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ..................... 67

SB INI.DLY,

Sound field parameter ..................... 66

SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ............... 78

SB LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ..................... 67

SB ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ..................... 67

SCIENCE, Radio Data System program

type .................................................. 59

Sci-Fi, Sound field programs ............... 49

Selection, Audio input jacks ................ 43

Selection,

MULTI CH INPUT component ...... 43

Selection, Radio Data System

program type ................................... 59

SET MENU usage ............................... 76

Set-top box connection ........................ 27

Short message display,

Display settings ............................... 88

SHORT MESSAGE,

Display settings ............................... 88

Shuffle iPod playback .......................... 62

SIGNAL INFO .................................... 44

Signal information ............................... 75

SILENT CINEMA ............................... 51

SILENT CINEMA indicator ............... 35

SLEEP indicator .................................. 35

Sleep timer ........................................... 45

Sound field indicators .......................... 35

Sound field parameter changing .......... 64

Sound field programs .......................... 46

Sound field programs selection ........... 46

Sound field programs

with headphones .............................. 51

Sound field programs without surround

speakers ........................................... 51

SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........... 82

Sound menu, Manual setup ................. 73

SOURCE,

Operation mode selector .................. 36

SP, Auto setup parameter .................... 38

Speaker distance,

Auto setup parameter ...................... 38

Speaker distance, Basic menu ............. 80

Speaker distances ................................. 80

SPEAKER IMP.,

Advanced setup ............................. 113

Speaker impedance setting .................. 33

Speaker impedance,

Advanced setup ............................. 113

Speaker level adjusting ........................ 53

Speaker level,

Auto setup parameter ...................... 38

Speaker level, Basic menu ................... 79

Speaker settings, Basic menu .............. 77

SPEAKER, Dynamic range ................. 83

SPEAKER, Low frequency

effect level ....................................... 83

Speakers, Dynamic range .................... 83

Speakers, Low frequency

effect level ....................................... 83

Specifications .................................... 131

Index

136 En

Spectacle, Sound field programs ......... 49

SPORT, Radio Data System

program type .................................... 59

Sports, Sound field programs ............... 48

Standard, Sound field programs ........... 49

STANDBY CHARGE, Dock set ......... 87

Standby mode, Main zone ................... 33

Standby mode, Zone2, Zone3 ............ 110

STEREO indicator ............................... 35

STEREO, Sound field programs .......... 50

STRAIGHT .......................................... 51

Straight Compressed Music Enhancer

effect level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 69

Straight Enhancer EFFECT LEVEL .... 69

STRAIGHT mode ................................ 51

SUBWOOFER PHASE,

Speaker settings ............................... 79

Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ...... 79

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................ 29

Supplied accessories .............................. 4

SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI set ............ 85

Support audio, HDMI set ..................... 85

SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............ 78

SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE

OUT jack connection ....................... 29

Surround back initial delay,

Sound field parameter ...................... 66

Surround back liveness,

Sound field parameter ...................... 67

Surround back room size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 67

SURROUND DECODE,

Decoder category ............................. 70

Surround initial delay,

Sound field parameter ...................... 66

Surround left/right back speakers,

Speaker settings ............................... 78

Surround left/right speakers,

Speaker settings ............................... 78

Surround liveness,

Sound field parameter ...................... 67

SURROUND PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................ 29

Surround room size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 67

System memory ................................... 75

■ T

Test tone, Basic menu .......................... 80

Test tone, Equalizer ............................. 82

TEST, Equalizer ................................... 82

The Bottom Line,

Sound field programs ...................... 48

The Roxy Theatre,

Sound field programs ...................... 48

Tonal quality adjusting ........................ 52

TONE BYPASS, Audio settings ......... 84

Tone bypass, Audio settings ................ 84

Transmit indicator ................................ 36

Troubleshooting ................................. 117

TUNED indicator ................................. 35

Tuner frequency step,

Advanced setup ..............................116

TUNER FRQ STEP,

Advanced setup ..............................116

Tuner indicators ...................................35

Turning off ...........................................33

Turning on ............................................33

Turntable connection ............................28

TV controlling by Remote control .......97

TV controlling, Remote control ...........97

TV monitor connection ........................24

TV, Operation mode selector ...............36

■ U

UNIT, Speaker distance .......................80

Unit, Speaker distance ..........................80

Unprocessed input sources ...................51

■ V

VARIED, Radio Data System

program type ....................................59

VCR connection ...................................27

Vertical dialogue position,

Sound field parameter ......................65

VIDEO AUX jacks ..............................31

Video cable plugs .................................20

VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........89

Video conversion, Display settings ......89

Video information ................................44

VIDEO jacks ........................................20

Video jacks ...........................................20

Video signal flow .................................23

Video sources in the background .........45

Village Vanguard,

Sound field programs .......................47

Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................51

VIRTUAL indicator .............................35

VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................5

VOLUME level indicator .....................34

Volume level,

Auto setup parameter .......................40

Volume menu, Manual setup ...............73

VOLUME TRIM, Input menu .............86

Volume Trim, Input menu ...................86

■ W

Wake on RS-232C access,

Advanced setup ..............................114

Warehouse Loft,

Sound field programs .......................47

■ Y

YPAO indicator ....................................35

■ Z

Zone set, Option menu .........................91

ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators ..................35

“

MASTER ON/OFF” or

“

DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel

or the remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or the pages at the

end of this manual for the

information about each position of

the parts.

137 En

English

Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland

Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from

whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our

website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).

The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha

undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge

for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been

discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.

Conditions

1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a

statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the

product may be returned at the customer’s expense.

2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.

3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.

4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:

a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.

b. Damage resulting from:

(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.

(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to

ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.

(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper

use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in

the country where it is used.

(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.

(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.

(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety

standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.

(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.

(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or

http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)

5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.

6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the

product.

7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.

8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising

from their sales/purchase contract.

■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/

Фронтальная панель

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

MODE

TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

ON/OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

MODE

TUNING

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

TUNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

CBM

IGF

APPENDIX

■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/

Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

A/B/C/D/E

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

FREQ/TEXT EON

MODE

– PTY SEEK – START

ENHANCERSTEREO

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

ENHANCERSTEREO

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

iii

Sound output in each sound field program

Son émis dans chaque correction de champ sonore

Klangausgabe in jedem soundfeldprogramm

Ljudutmatning för varje ljudfältsprogram

Geluidsweergave in elk van de geluidsveldprogramma’s

Воспроизведение звучания для каждой программы звукового поля

Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker

Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker

Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output

Speaker from which no sound is being output

SBR

C SR PL

SBL

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

APPENDIX

*1 / / : OFF

*2 / / : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.

PL x

Program PRIORITY

Input audio source

2-channel

(monaural)

2-channel

(stereo)

5.1-channel*

6.1/7.1-channel*

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

Hall in Vienna

Hall in Amsterdam

Church in Freiburg

Chamber

LIVE/CLUB

Village Vanguard

Warehouse Loft

Cellar Club

The Roxy Theatre

The Bottom Line

PRNS

1124

ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Music Video

Recital/Opera

Action Game

Roleplaying Game

MOVIE

STANDARD

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

Drama

PRNS

3224

7424

MOVIE

Mono Movie

PRNS

3224

STEREO

2ch Stereo

PRNS/SB

5555

STEREO

7ch Stereo

MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

PRNS/SB

4444

SUR.DECODE

Sur. Decode

(Pro Logic)

(PLII Movie)

(PLII Game)

PRNS/SB

6774

SUR.DECODE

Sur. Decode

(PLII Music)

PRNS/SB

8774

SUR.DECODE

Sur. Decode

(PLIIx Movie)

(PLIIx Game)

(Neo:6 Cinema)

PRNS/SB

6474

SUR.DECODE

Sur. Decode

(PLIIx Music)

(Neo:6 Music)

PRNS/SB

8474

STRAIGHT

Pure Direct

MUSIC ENHANCER

Straight Enhancer

PRNS/SB

5574

List of remote control codes

Liste des codes de commande

Liste der Fernbedienungscodes

Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder

Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes

Список кодов дистанционного управления

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM 0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE 0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE 0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH 0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS 0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS 0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCLAREN 0184

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

YAMAHA 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

YAMAHA 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,

0782, 0821, 0823,

0857, 1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE 0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME 0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC 0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL 0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 0530

URBAN CONCEPTS 0530

XBOX 0549

YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

HD DVD PLAYER

TOSHIBA 2103

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

PHILIPS 2808

SHARP 2812, 2813

SONY 2809, 2810, 2811

YAMAHA 2807

Blu-lay Disc player

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

SAMSUNG 2816

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN 0086

APPENDIX

YAMAHA 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL 1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC 1216

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

CAPETRONIC 0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC 1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS 1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN 0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,

2601

(TUNER ID1) 2602

(TUNER ID2) 2603

(iPod) 2606

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL 0880

CANAL SATELLITE 0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS 0423

CROSSDIGITAL 1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER 0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,

1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK 0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC 1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL 1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE 0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

YAMAHA 2700,2701

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,

0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN 0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL 0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

vii

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG 0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,

0081, 0087, 0120,

0172, 0181, 0193,

0478, 0729, 1174,

1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND 0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH 0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON 0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY 0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION 0064, 0291,

0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC 0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER 0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,

0131, 0132, 0136,

0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX 0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN 0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,

0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,

0539, 0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,

0181, 0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI 0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION 0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

viii

APPENDIX

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ 0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW 0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,

0362, 0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER 0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677,

0796, 0860,

2900 (projector),

2901 (projector),

2903,

2904 (projector)

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION 0305

AMERICAN HIGH 0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL 0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,

0087, 1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME 0064

ELECTROPHONIC 0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON 0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC 1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA 0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V1800

Printed in Malaysia WK69330

RX-V1800

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

RX-V1800_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 6:13 PM

The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.

Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.

Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung.

Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen.

De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing.

Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации.

I manuali e le lettere dell’alfabeto corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni.

Los números y las letras en el interior de círculos se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones.

■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель/Pannello anteriore/

Panel delantero

RX-V1800

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

SLEEP

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONES

MODE

TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

UNING

PRESET/

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROL

SELECT

AUDIO

TONE

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

ON/OFF

CB M

A LK

IGF

EDHJ

00_sheet_RX-V1800_GE.book Page 1 Friday, June 15, 2007 9:29 PM

■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/

Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ/Telecomando/Mando a distancia

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

DISC SKIP

VOLUME

TV VOL

EFFECT

PARAMETER

STRAIGHT

A/B/C/D/E

SRCH MODE

PURE DIRECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

SUR. DECODE

FREQ/TEXT EON

MODE

– PTY SEEK – START

ENHANCERSTEREO

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL VCRDVR

V-AUX/DOCK

TUNER CD CD-R

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

SLEEPAUDIO SEL

CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

SYSTEM MEMORY

ENHANCERSTEREO

DVD BD/HD DVD PHONOMD/TAPE

WK69410

Printed in Malaysia

00_sheet_RX-V1800_GE.book Page i Friday, June 15, 2007 9:29 PM

Documenttranscriptie

RX-V1800_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 6:13 PM G RX-V1800 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WK69330 RX-V1800 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. En 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: ................................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by A MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. This symbol mark is according to the EU directive 2002/96/EC. This symbol mark means that electrical and electronic equipment, at their endof-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. Please act according to your local rules and do not dispose of your old products with your normal household waste. Contents Notice ....................................................................... 2 Features ................................................................... 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 4 Getting started ........................................................ 5 Quick start guide .................................................... 6 Connections ........................................................... 12 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ................................................................... 37 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 37 BASIC OPERATION Advanced sound configurations...........................64 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 64 Selecting decoders ................................................... 69 Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........72 Using SET MENU................................................... 76 1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 77 2 VOLUME MENU ................................................ 81 3 SOUND MENU.................................................... 82 4 INPUT MENU...................................................... 85 5 OPTION MENU................................................... 88 Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)......................................93 Saving the current system settings........................... 93 Loading the stored system settings .......................... 94 Using examples........................................................ 95 Remote control features........................................97 Basic procedure ....................................................... 42 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 43 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 43 Using your headphones............................................ 43 Muting the audio output........................................... 44 Displaying the input source information (SIGNAL INFO) ................................................. 44 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source.................. 45 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 45 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 97 Setting remote control codes ................................... 99 Programming codes from other remote controls ... 101 Changing source names in the display window..... 102 Macro programming features ................................ 103 Clearing configurations ......................................... 106 Using multi-zone configuration..........................108 Advanced setup....................................................113 Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 113 Using audio features ............................................. 52 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 54 Automatic tuning ..................................................... 54 Manual tuning.......................................................... 54 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 55 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 55 Selecting preset stations........................................... 56 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 57 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Front Panel ...............................................................i Remote Control ...................................................... ii Sound output in each sound field program......... iii List of remote control codes ...................................v Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 58 Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode) .............................................. 59 Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service .............................................. 60 Using iPod™.......................................................... 61 Controlling iPod™................................................... 61 Recording .............................................................. 63 1 En English “A MASTER ON/OFF” or “1 DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. APPENDIX Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) ......................................... 58 Troubleshooting...................................................117 Resetting the system............................................124 Glossary................................................................125 Sound field program information......................129 Parametric equalizer information .....................130 Specifications .......................................................131 Index .....................................................................133 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 52 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 52 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 53 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 53 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 108 Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 109 Sound field programs ........................................... 46 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 46 Sound field program descriptions............................ 46 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 51 BASIC OPERATION Playback ................................................................ 42 PREPARATION PREPARATION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION NOTICE Notice About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “AMASTER ON/OFF” or “1 DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). • The shape of the illustration (for example, speaker terminals, input/output jacks, AC outlets, etc.) in this manual may vary depending on the model. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo, and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. 2 En FEATURES Features iPod™ controlling capability ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Surround: 130 W + 130 W Surround back: 130 W + 130 W ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality multi-channel source playback ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Digital audio decoders ◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder ◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ DTS NEO:6 decoder Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) Radio Data System capability (Europe model only) Other features ◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input ◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability ◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and macro capability ◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS ◆ SYSTEM MEMORY capability for saving and recalling multiple system parameter settings ◆ Sleep timer INTRODUCTION Built-in 7-channel power amplifier HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.3a ◆ Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability ◆ Deep Color video signal (30/36 bits) transmission capability ◆ High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability ◆ High definition digital audio format signals capability ◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out ◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or 480p/576p to 720p, 1080i or 1080p English 3 En Features Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following accessories. Remote control POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control (except Europe model) POWER Batteries (6) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (except Europe model) POWER TUNER CD MD/TAPE DVD DTV/CBL DVR STANDBY CD-R SELECT BD/HD DVD PHONO AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – VCR V-AUX/DOCK SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TV MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PRESET PURE DIRECT VOLUME Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (Europe model) A/B/C/D/E AUDIO ENTER MUTE A/B/C/D/E PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT SYSTEM MEMORY 2 1 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 7 6 4 MOVIE ID1 ID2 8 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON + 10 ENT MODE – PTY SEEK – START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Speaker terminal wrench Power cables (Two for Asia model) Indoor FM antenna Note The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models. 4 En Optimizer microphone AM loop antenna GETTING STARTED Getting started Notes 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the transmit indicator (O) does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) 2 1 3 ■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control (Except Europe model) 1 3 2 INTRODUCTION ■ Installing batteries in the remote control Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. 230240V Voltage indication English 1 5 En QUICK START GUIDE Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker Preparation: Check the items Subwoofer Surround right speaker In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. ❏ AM loop antenna ❏ Indoor FM antenna ❏ Power cable Center speaker Surround back right speaker DVD player Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 7 The following items are not included in the package of this unit. ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2 ❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1 ❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 4 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1. Two surround speakers 2. One center speaker 3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s) ❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 8 Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback ☞ P. 10 Enjoy DVD playback! 6 En ❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 7 ❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor .......................................... x 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. ❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2 Select RCA composite video cables. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1 Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front speakers and center speaker Loosen HDMI VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT BD/HD DVD A BD/HD DVD B DVD C DTV/CBL Y DVD DTV/CBL IN Insert INTRODUCTION Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Tighten ANTENNA DVR OUT IN VCR OUT MONITOR OUT Y FM 75Ω UNBAL. AC IN AM GND S VIDEO IN4 PB PB PR PR IN DVR VIDEO OUT (REC) (PLAY) SP1 MD/ R PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + L TAPE SPEAKERS L WRENCH HOLDER + IN3 IN REMOTE OUT R DTV/ CBL PHONO GND IN2 L DVD R CD CD-R CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 + ZONE 3 OUT(REC) AUDIO + SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DOCK L SINGLE CENTER + + AC OUTLETS R IN(PLAY) IN1 CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SURROUND SP2 L + ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SUR.BACK/ PRE OUT PRESENCE L ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT Speaker terminal wrench + BD/ HD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD OUT 2 DVD 3 DVR 4 CD 1 5 BD/ HD DVD 6 DVD 7 DTV/ CBL 8 CD-R 9 MD/ TAPE R + FRONT L + 2 TRIGGER OUT RS-232C SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Speaker terminals 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the front right speaker To the front left speaker To the center speaker Surround and surround back speakers 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. To the surround back right speaker 1 2 3 4 To the surround right speaker 4 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. To the surround back left speaker To the surround left speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and the input jack of the subwoofer. Subwoofer AV receiver Input jack Subwoofer cable 7 En English SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components DVD VIDEO 2 Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and the DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. VIDEO MONITOR OUT AV receiver DVD player HDMI VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT BD/HD DVD A BD/HD DVD B DVD C DTV/CBL Y Y PB PB DVD DTV/CBL IN ANTENNA DVR OUT IN VCR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75Ω UNBAL. AC IN AM GND S VIDEO IN4 IN DVR (PLAY) PR PR VIDEO OUT (REC) SPEAKERS SP1 MD/ PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + L TAPE R L WRENCH HOLDER + IN3 IN REMOTE OUT R DTV/ CBL PHONO GND IN2 L DVD R CD CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND CD-R CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 + ZONE 3 OUT(REC) AUDIO + SUB WOOFER SURROUND + SP2 L + ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SUR.BACK/ SUB WOOFER SB(8CH) PRE OUT MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DOCK CENTER + AC OUTLETS R IN(PLAY) IN1 L SINGLE PRESENCE L ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT + BD/ HD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD OUT 2 DVD 3 DVR 4 CD 1 5 BD/ HD DVD 6 DVD 7 DTV/ CBL 8 CD-R 9 MD/ TAPE R + FRONT L + DVD VIDEO jack 2 TRIGGER OUT RS-232C Composite video output jack Video cable DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL 3 Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 1 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video input jack of your video monitor. Video monitor AV receiver Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack of this unit. DVD player Digital coaxial audio output jack Digital coaxial audio cable AV receiver DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack y • When you connect a component that has only a SCART jack, use an appropriate converter. The connection between a converter and this unit depends on signals that are available on the converter. For details, refer to the instructions of your converter. • This unit cannot transmit RGB signals. 8 En Video input jack Video cable VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Quick start guide 4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and indoor FM antenna to this unit. Connect the supplied power cable to this unit and then plug the power cable and other components into the AC wall outlet. y • This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) that provide(s) power to other components (except Korea model). See page 32 for details. • (Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet. Indoor FM antenna INTRODUCTION AM loop antenna 5 For further connections • Using other kinds of speaker combinations ☞ P. 14 • Connecting a video monitor via various ways of connection ☞ P. 24 • Connecting a DVD player via various ways of connection ☞ P. 25 Note The types of the supplied indoor FM antenna and the FM antenna terminal of this unit are different depending on the models. Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna Press and hold the tab Insert • Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video recorder ☞ P. 27 ☞ P. 27 • Connecting a set-top box • Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, or a turntable ☞ P. 28 Release the tab ☞ P. 29 • Connecting an external amplifier • Connecting a DVD player via multi-channel analog audio connection ☞ P. 30 y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal. Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock ☞ P. 31 • Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 31 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 31 • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 32 General connection information • General information on jacks and cable plugs ☞ P. 20 • General information on HDMI • Speaker impedance setting ☞ P. 21–22 ☞ P. 33 English 9 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 33). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (see page 113). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position on the front panel. 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. 5 Rotate Q VOLUME to adjust the volume. ■ After using this unit... Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode. 3 Rotate the C INPUT selector to set the input source to “DVD”. y • The recommended sound field program is set for each input source (DVD, etc.). You can also use various sound field programs and other sound modes for playback. Refer to the following pages for details: – see pages 46 to 50 to use various sound field programs – see page 51 to turn on or off the sound effect – see page 52 to use the Pure Direct mode for high fidelity sound • You can also set the input source to “TUNER” to use the FM/AM tuning feature. For information on the FM/AM tuning, see pages 54 to 57. 10 En This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or 8 POWER on the remote control). See page 33 for details. Quick start guide What do you want to do with this unit? • Basic operations of this unit ☞ P. 42 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 54 • Enjoying Radio Data System programs ☞ P. 58 • Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 61 Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 46 • Using the Pure Direct mode for high fidelity sound ☞ P. 52 • Adjusting the tonal quality of the speakers ☞ P. 52 • Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 64 Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit • Setting the basic speaker configuration ☞ P. 77 • Adjusting the balance of the speaker levels ☞ P. 79 • Setting the distance of each speaker ☞ P. 80 • Setting the parameters related to the volume level ☞ P. 81 • Adjusting the tonal quality by using the graphic equalizer ☞ P. 82 • Adjusting the lip sync function for the HDMI connection ☞ P. 84 • Assigning the input/output jacks of this unit ☞ P. 86 Adjusting the parameters of this unit • Setting the parameters of the front panel display or OSD ☞ P. 88 • Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 37 • Setting the parameter related to the video signals ☞ P. 89 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 97 • Protecting the various settings ☞ P. 90 • Setting the parameters of the multi-zone feature ☞ P. 91 Additional features • Displaying the current input source signal information in the OSD ☞ P. 44 Adjusting the advanced parameters • Saving and recalling the system settings of this unit (SYSTEM MEMORY) ☞ P. 93 • Setting the speaker impedance of the connected speakers ☞ P. 113 ☞ P. 43 • Setting the parameters of this unit to default values ☞ P. 116 • Using headphones • Using this unit in multiple rooms simultaneously (multi-zone configuration) ☞ P. 108 • Automatically turning off this unit INTRODUCTION Using various input sources ☞ P. 45 English 11 En Connections Rear panel 1 2 HDMI 3 4 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT BD/HD DVD A BD/HD DVD B DVD C DTV/CBL Y Y PB PB PR PR 5 DVD DTV/CBL IN 6 7 ANTENNA DVR OUT IN VCR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75Ω UNBAL. AC IN AM GND S VIDEO IN4 IN DVR (PLAY) VIDEO OUT (REC) SP1 MD/ R PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + L TAPE SPEAKERS L WRENCH HOLDER + IN3 IN REMOTE OUT R DTV/ CBL PHONO GND CD CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND CD-R CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 + ZONE 3 L SINGLE CENTER + + AC OUTLETS IN2 L DVD R R IN(PLAY) IN1 OUT(REC) AUDIO + SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DOCK PRESENCE + ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R L ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT + BD/ HD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD OUT 2 DVD 3 DVR 4 CD 1 8 9 Name 5 BD/ HD DVD 6 DVD 7 DTV/ CBL 8 CD-R 9 MD/ TAPE R + L FRONT + 2 TRIGGER OUT 0 RS-232C A B Page 1 HDMI jacks 2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 3 Audio component jacks 28 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 31, 108 4 Video component jacks 24 – 27 5 ANTENNA terminals 32 6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) 32 7 AC IN 32 AC OUTLET(S) 32 8 DOCK terminal 31 9 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks 25 B MULTI CH INPUT jacks 30 PRE OUT jacks 29 ZONE OUT jacks 108 Speaker terminals 16 WRENCH HOLDER 18 12 En SP2 L SURROUND SUR.BACK/ PRE OUT 21 24 – 27 0 TRIGGER OUT jacks These are control expansion terminals for custom installation. A RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your dealer for details. Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout 7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended to play back the sound of high definition digital audio formats (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 16 for connection information. y C FR FL FR 30˚ SW FL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR SBL C SL PREPARATION We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 46 for details. SL SR SBR 1.8 m (6 ft) 30 cm (12 in) or more Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. English 13 En Connections ■ 6.1-channel speaker layout ■ 5.1-channel speaker layout See page 17 for connection information. See page 17 for connection information. y y We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 15 for details. We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 15 for details. FR FR SW FL SR SB C SW FL SR C SL SL 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) C C FR FL FR FL 30˚ SL 30˚ SR SL SR 60˚ SL 60˚ 80˚ SR SL 80˚ SR SB Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) Center speaker (C) Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) Subwoofer (SW) The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13). Surround back speaker (SB) Connect a single surround speaker to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals and place the single surround back speaker behind the listening position. The surround back left and right channel signals are mixed down and output at the single surround back speaker when you set “SUR.B L/R SP” to “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 78). Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) Center speaker (C) Subwoofer (SW) The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13). Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers behind the listening position. For the smooth and unbroken sound field behind the listening position, place the surround left and right speakers farther back compared with the placement in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). For other speaker combinations You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations. Use the automatic setup feature (see page 37) or set the “SPEAKER SET” parameters in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 72) to output the surround sounds at the connected speakers. 14 En Connections ■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (see page 46). We recommend that you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” (see page 78). 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL FL FR PREPARATION 1.8 m (6 ft) PR 1.8 m (6 ft) C Note You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field programs. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 79). English 15 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 33). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 33). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (see page 113). Notes • A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. • You can use the SP1 terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 108). • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field programs. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 79). ■ For the 7.1-channel speaker setting Subwoofer Surround back speakers Left Right Presence speakers Left Right Center speaker SP1 R PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + + R + SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS L + L SINGLE SURROUND CENTER + + SP2 L + ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R L PRE OUT + R + FRONT L + Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers (see page 108) Left Right Surround speakers Left Right Front speakers 16 En Connections ■ For the 6.1-channel speaker setting Surround back speaker Subwoofer Presence speakers (see pages 15 and 16) SPEAKERS SP1 R PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + + L + L SINGLE CENTER + + SP2 L SURROUND + ZONE 2/ZONE 3 L R PRE OUT + R + L FRONT + Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers (see page 108) PREPARATION R + SUB WOOFER Center speaker Left Right Surround speakers Left Right Front speakers ■ For the 5.1-channel speaker setting Subwoofer Front speakers for the bi-amplification connections (see page 19) Presence speakers (see pages 15 and 16) SP1 R PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + + R + SUB WOOFER Center speaker SPEAKERS L + L SINGLE SURROUND CENTER + + SP2 L + ZONE 2/ZONE 3 R L PRE OUT + R + FRONT L + Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers (see page 108) Left Right Surround speakers English Left Right Front speakers 17 En Connections ■ Connecting the speaker cable 5 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this unit when not in use. 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench ■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker terminals Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see page 108). 1 Open the tab. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 4 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Close the tab to secure the wire. Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. 18 En Connections ■ Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) 1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench ■ Using bi-amplification connections Caution Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 This unit Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP R + L SINGLE + R SURROUND L R FRONT L + PREPARATION This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support biamplification connection. To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP speaker terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 116). + Banana plug + + y You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug. Right Left Front speakers Note When you make the conventional connection with the speakers, make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details. English 19 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL DIGITAL L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R AUDIO Left and right analog audio cable plugs C Coaxial digital audio cable plug VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connect the video input jacks of this unit to the video output jacks of the input source components to switch the audio and video sources simultaneously. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Note You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals. 20 En VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See pages 23 and 89 for details. Connections Information on HDMI™ This unit has four HDMI input jacks and one HDMI output jack for digital audio and video signal input/output. Connect the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3, or HDMI IN 4 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI input jack of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector). The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of the selected input source are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. PREPARATION This HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.3a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.3a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Note You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 44). ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI ■ Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks HDMI input jack HDMI cable plug Assigned input source IN1 BD/HD DVD IN2 DVD y IN3 DTV/CBL • We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. IN4 DVR Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • The HDMI OUT jack outputs the audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks only even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” (see page 85). • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. • The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 89) to activate this feature. English 21 En Connections ■ HDMI signal compatibility with this unit Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz,1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. y • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following connections: – multi-channel analog audio input (see page 30) – DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via the Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents. 22 En Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: Video signal format – 480i/576i – 480p/576p – 720p – 1080i – 1080p Refresh rate – 59.94(60)/50 Hz This unit also accepts 30 or 36-bit Deep Color video signals. Connections Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Input Output Output HDMI HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO Digital output Through Analog output Video conversion ON (see page 89) Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at one of the HDMI input jacks can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” (see page 85). • The following types of audio signals can be only input at HDMI input jacks: – DSD – Dolby TrueHD – Dolby Digital Plus – DTS-HD Master Audio – DTS-HD High Resolution Audio y You can deinterlace and convert the resolution of the video signals by using “VIDEO SET” parameters. See page 89 for details. Notes • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • Digital video signals input at the HDMI input jacks cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • The analog component video signals (with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution only) are converted to the S-video or composite video signals and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT jacks and is not recorded. English 23 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Notes Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. y You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 85). HDMI • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • Set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 89) to display the short message displays and sound field parameter displays. • The “SET MENU” and sound field parameter displays appear with the gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting of the parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (see page 88). • If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing automatically (see page 84). Connect the video monitor to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature. VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR OUT Y PB V PR Component video in Video in S-video in HDMI in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 24 En S Connections Connecting other components Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Notes PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 89), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 24). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 89), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 86). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL and the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack. • The short message displays do not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input. ■ Connecting a Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player Connect your Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player to the HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit to perform the features of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD completely. Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player HDMI out Component out Audio out S-video out Y HDMI PB Optical out PR Video out S L V R O VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO BD/HD DVD A BD/HD DVD Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR L R IN1 DIGITAL INPUT BD/ HD DVD OPTICAL 5 BD/ HD DVD indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections English 25 En Connections ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player HDMI out Optical out Coaxial out Audio out Component out S-video out C HDMI Y PB PR Video out L V S R O VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO DVD B DVD Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR L R IN2 DVD DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL 2 DVD 6 DVD indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 26 En Connections ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR Note * When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. * VIDEO HDMI IN DVR OUT IN VCR OUT S VIDEO IN4 VIDEO DVR L PREPARATION R DVR IN OUT DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL 3 DVR L V S S-video in R Video in R Audio in L Audio out V Video out S S-video out Coaxial out HDMI out C DVD recorder, PVR or VCR ■ Connecting a set-top box HDMI out Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver or HDTV decoder Optical out Component out S V L R Audio out PR Video out HDMI PB S-video out Y O VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL C DTV/CBL Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR L IN3 R DTV/ CBL DIGITAL INPUT English OPTICAL 7 DTV/ CBL 27 En Connections ■ Connecting audio components Notes • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. • When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL jack and the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack. Audio out L Optical in R O Audio in L R IN (PLAY) CD recorder OUT (REC) MD/ L TAPE R PHONO GND CD CD-R L R IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD R L R O Audio in L 9 MD/ TAPE MD recorder or tape deck indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 28 En Optical in O Audio out CD player C Optical out R Coaxial out L Audio out Ground Turntable R Audio out L 8 CD-R 4 CD Connections ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Notes • • • • • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer unit. Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). You can use the automatic setup feature even if you use an external amplifier (see page 37). 2 CENTER FRONT 3 4 PREPARATION 1 SURROUND SINGLE(SB) L R SUR.BACK/ SUB PRESENCE WOOFER PRE OUT 5 1 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. 2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. 3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 4 SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack. y • Set the “SUR.B L/R SP” to “LRGx2”, “LRGx1”, “SMLx2” or “SMLx1” and “PRESENCE SP” to “NONE” (see page 78) to output the surround back channel signals at the SUR.BACK/ PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. • Set the “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 78) to output the presence channel signals at the SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. • When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 19), this unit output the front channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. English 29 En Connections ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH” (see page 87), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH” together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected as the input source, only the signals input at MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output from the connected headphones. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input ( CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND ) ( C) MD/ L TAPE L * R R CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) L MULTI CH INPUT L L R R R Surround out SUB SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT R L R L R Front out Center out Subwoofer out Surround out L Surround back out Front out Center out Subwoofer out SUB WOOFER Multi-format player/ External decoder Multi-format player/ External decoder Note * The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH” (see page 85). 30 En Connections ■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. PURE DIRECT DOCK PREPARATION Note VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE SLEEP EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O ■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Optical output Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component Audio output Remote control out IN Video output REMOTE S-Video output When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. See page 108 for more details of this feature. Game console or video camera OUT Remote control in Yamaha component (CD or DVD player, etc.) English 31 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power cable into an AC wall outlet. Notes AC IN • (Asia and General models only) Be sure to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 116). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. Indoor FM antenna (supplied) To the AC wall outlet AC OUTLETS AM loop antenna (supplied) Note ANTENNA FM 75Ω UNBAL. GND AM (Asia model only) Select on of the supplied power cables suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 131. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. 32 En Connections Setting the speaker impedance Caution If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. Turning this unit on and off ■ Turning on this unit Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turn on this unit by pressing A MASTER ON/ OFF, the main zone is turned on. y Make sure this unit is turned off. When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few seconds before this unit can reproduce sound. 2 Press and hold O STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. ■ Turning off this unit STRAIGHT EFFECT Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. PREPARATION 1 Notes While holding down MASTER 3 Rotate the N PROGRAM selector to select “SPEAKER IMP.”. 4 Press O STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. 5 Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Note • B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as 8 POWER and 7 STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when A MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn off this unit. ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or 7 STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or 8 POWER) to turn on the main zone. y • When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few seconds before this unit can reproduce sound. • These buttons are operational only when A MASTER ON/ OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. If there are some problems... • First, turn off and then turn on this unit again. • If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this unit. See page 124 for details. English 33 En Connections Front panel display 1 3 2 V-AUX DOCK 4 VCR DVR DTV/CBL DVD BD/HD DVD MD/TAPE 5 CD-R CD PHONO TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY 96/24 L C R ZONE3 RT CT LFE SL SB SR SLEEP EON VOLUME MUTE 96 q DIGITAL PLUS 24 q PL x q EX MASTER AUDIO q TRUE HD See page 35 for details. TUNER dB VIRTUAL HiFi DSP DSD YPAO ENHANCER SILENT CINEMA PCM MATRIX DISCRETE HD MULTI CH SBL 6 7 8 9 0 A B SBR PTY HOLD TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY ZONE3 RT CT SLEEP EON PTY HOLD 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at one of the HDMI input jacks (see page 21). 8 Input channel and speaker indicators 2 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 31). Input channel indicators 3 Battery charge indicator Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see page 61). 4 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 5 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator • Indicates the current volume level. • The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 44). 6 Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 7 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. 34 En Presence speaker indicators L C R LFE SL SB SR SBL SBR Input channel indicators • Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. • Light up or flash according to the settings of the speakers when this unit is in the auto setup procedure (see page 37) or the speaker level setting procedure in the “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 79). Presence speaker indicators Light up according to setting for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 78) in “SPEAKER SET” when this unit is in the auto setup procedure (see page 37) or the speaker level setting procedure in the “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 79). y You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 37) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 78) and “SUR.B L/R SP” (see page 78) in “SPEAKER SET”. Connections 9 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode. TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 54). STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit (see page 54). CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 46). HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 46). VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 51). F Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 46). MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 55). G ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 50). 0 ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on (see page 109). A SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 45). B Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. PREPARATION AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 54). E DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound field programs are selected. H Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 43). I SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 51). J Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. PS, PTY, RT and CT Light up according to the selected Radio Data System display mode. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. VIRTUAL HiFi DSP C D DSD PCM YPAO ENHANCER SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE HD 96 q DIGITAL PLUS 24 q PL x q EX MASTER AUDIO q TRUE HD E F G H I J C YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 37). English D Input signal indicators Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 35 En Connections Using the remote control Notes The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. Remote control sensor Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 30 30 • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 99. Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. Display window (A) Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. Infrared window (P) Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. Transmit indicator (O) Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. Operation mode selector (C) The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode selector position. AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 98). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 97). 36 En To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. The following menu screen appears on the video Using AUTO SETUP monitor. AUTO SETUP Notes You can also run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the front panel display. When you connect the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack, the following display appears in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. y • The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold. • Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP. AUTO SETUP ENTER TO START ■ Basic procedure of the automatic setup 1 2 AUDIO SELECT Make sure of the following check points before starting the AUTO SETUP operations. ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. ❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit. ❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on. ❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). ❏ The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. ❏ If you use the external amplifiers (see page 29), the amplifiers are turned on and the settings are appropriate. ❏ The room is sufficiently quiet. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. “MIC ON” and “View OSD Menu” appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE SLEEP EDIT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO p [ y PREPARATION SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO WIRING;;;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;;;CHECK . START []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Start • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. • We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit is in the automatic setup procedure. Keep quiet when you leave the room. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the automatic setup procedure. 3 Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). OPTICAL VIDEO AUX English Omni-directional microphone 37 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. 4 Press 3 ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the automatic setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the automatic setup procedure. Once all items are set, the result display appears in the OSD. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Notes • During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. If you perform any operation while this unit is in the automatic setup procedure, “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. In such cases, select “RETRY” to restart the automatic setup procedure. • We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit is in the automatic setup procedure. Keep quiet when you leave the room. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the automatic setup procedure. Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes The display changes as follows. • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 2. • If an error occurs during the automatic setup procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 41. • When this unit detects potential problems during the automatic setup procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 41). • Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR PHASE:REV” appears during the automatic setup procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 79) is automatically set to “REVERSE”. AUTO SETUP p [ SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO WIRING;;;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;;;CHECK . START []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Start AUTO SETUP INITIALIZING . PRE CHECK MAIN CHECK EQUALIZING LEVEL [ ||||||||;;;;;;;;;; [ ] : EXIT 5 Press 3 ENTER to display the setup results in detail. AUTO SETUP SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 3.60/4.30m LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB >SET CANCEL SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 3.60/4.30m LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB >SET CANCEL []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Detail p . RESULT . RESULT [ AUTO SETUP p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Detail RESULT WIRING FRONT L;;;;;OK [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return 38 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 6 Press 3 l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. 8 Press 3 l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. AUTO SETUP Results of the speaker connection and wiring RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 3.60/4.30m LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB . >SET CANCEL Results of the speaker distance from the listening position p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter Result of the speaker detection and size 9 Press 3 ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. PREPARATION Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. SET MENU Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SYSTEM MEMORY ;SIGNAL INFO p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter Results of the speaker output level 10 y • Press 3 k / n to toggle between the parameters in a results. • If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 72). Press F SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. Notes • After you have completed the automatic setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. • The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer or external amplifiers if you connect them. • In the “EQUALIZING” results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. Press 3 ENTER to return to the top result display. AUTO SETUP English RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 3.60/4.30m LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB . >SET CANCEL p []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter [ 7 SYSTEM MEMORY feature You can save multiple result of the automatic setup by using the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See page 93 for details. 39 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ■ Customizing the measurements Parametric equalizer type EQ Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the crucial frequency bands for the listening room and adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment from the following choices. Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT, SKIP • Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little harsh. • Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. • Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. • Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no adjustments. You can select the parametric equalizer type, and activate or deactivate each check items. 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to this unit and place the microphone appropriately. Refer to the steps 1 to 3 of “Basic procedure of the automatic setup” on page 37. 2 Press 3 k repeatedly to select “SETUP” and then press 3 l / h to select the desired setting. Choices: AUTO, RELOAD • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the current settings. When you select “RELOAD”, the previous auto setup result appears in the OSD. See step 4 on page 38 and carry out the operations. Notes Volume level LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Choices: CHECK, SKIP • Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust this item. • Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no adjustments. • “RELOAD” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 2, no test tones are output and the result of the previous automatic setup appears in the OSD. 3 Press 3 k / n repeatedly to select “WIRING”, “DISTANCE”, “SIZE”, “EQ”, or “LEVEL” and then press 3 l / h to select the desired setting. This unit performs the following checks: Speaker wiring WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Choices: CHECK, SKIP • Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust the item. • Select “SKIP” to skip the item and perform no adjustments. 40 En 4 After the setting of the measurement, start the automatic setup procedure. Refer to steps 4 to 6 of “Basic procedure of the automatic setup” on page 38 for details. SYSTEM MEMORY feature You can save multiple result of the automatic setup by using the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See page 93 for details. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ■ If an error screen appears 1 Press 3 l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press 3 ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press 3 ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. ERROR E-9:USER CANCEL Don't operate any function AUTO SETUP WARNING 2 . RESULT . >RETRY [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 2 p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Detail Press 3 l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. y PREPARATION SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 3.60/4.30m LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB >SET CANCEL EXIT WARNING • If “E-5:NOISY” appears in the OSD, you can also select “PROCEED” and let this unit continue the automatic setup. However, we recommend that you perform the automatic setup procedure again for more accurate adjustment. W-1:OUT OF PHASE Reverse channel FL --CENTER --PR SL --SBL --[p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return ERROR E-5:NOISY Keep silent y • For details about each warning message, refer to the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 123. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “–––” is displayed instead. • If the volume level setting of the connected subwoofer is too high or low, “TOO LOUD” (the volume level setting is too high) or “TOO LOW” (the volume level setting is too low) is displayed in the “W-3:LEVEL ERROR” display. Adjust the volume level setting of the connected subwoofer appropriately. . >RETRY EXIT PROCEED [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Enter • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears in the OSD, you can select only “EXIT”. • For details about each error message, refer to the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 123. ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the automatic setup procedure, “WARNING” appears in the result display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. WARNING W-3:LEVEL ERROR --FR CENTER PL ----SR --SBL SWFR:TOO LOUD [p]/[[]: Select Return [ENTER]: Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 3 Press 3 ENTER to return to the top result display. y The adjustment are made even if “WARNING” appears, however the adjustment may not be optimal. English 41 En Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the instruction manuals for the source component. • See page 54 for details about FM/AM tuning instructions. 4 Rotate Q VOLUME (or press B VOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. Control range: MUTE, –80.0 dB (minimum) to +16.5 dB (maximum) y To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the playback (see page 86). y Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP. See page 53 to adjust the level of each speaker. 5 Basic procedure 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Rotate the N PROGRAM selector (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons (N) repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 46 for details about sound field programs. y Currently selected sound field program category • See page 44 to display the input source information. • You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 88). • You can turn on or off the short message displays on the video monitor. See pages 88 for details. Movie Sci-Fi Currently selected sound field program 2 Rotate the C INPUT selector (or set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons (1)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. Available input sources V-AUX VCR DVR DTV/CBL DVD BD/HD DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER BD/HD DVD Currently selected input source 42 En Note Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43). y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 44 for details. Playback Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend that you set the audio input jack select setting to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select setting of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 91). 1 Press D AUDIO SELECT (or 9 AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack select setting. VCR DVR DTV/CBL DVD BD/HD DVD MD/TAPE A.SEL: CD-R CD PHONO y Use “MULTI CH” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for “MULTI CH” (see page 85). Note Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. Available input sources V-AUX Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel to select MULTI CH (or press 1 MULTI CH IN). MULTI CH BASIC OPERATION 2 Rotate the C INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (1)) to select the desired input source. Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 30) as the input source. TUNER AUTO PURE DIRECT VOLUME Currently selected audio input jack select setting AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE SLEEP EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 51). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected as the input source, only the signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output from the connected headphones. • All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. English This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when the HDMI input jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 86). y 43 En Playback Muting the audio output ■ Audio information FORMAT Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. y CHANNEL • You can also rotate Q VOLUME on the front panel or press B VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE” parameter in “VOLUME MENU” (see page 81). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. DIALOG The dialogue normalization level preset to the current input bitstream signal (see page 125). FLAG Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.). Press D MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press D MUTE again to resume the audio output. Displaying the input source information (SIGNAL INFO) You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 ;AUTO SETUP • “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. • Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz. • Even if you make settings to output bitstreames directly, some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams. ;SYSTEM MEMORY ;SIGNAL INFO ■ Video information Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press F SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. SET MENU . ;MANUAL SETUP 3 p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter 2 Press 3 n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press 3 ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. Press 3 l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. y The information is also appears in the front panel display. Press 3k / n repeatedly to change the displayed information. 4 Press F SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. 44 En Notes HDMI SIGNAL Type of the source video signals and the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. HDMI RES. Resolution of the input signal (analog or HDMI) and the output signal (HDMI). ANALOG RES. Resolution of the source video signals and the analog video signals output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI ERROR (HDMI MESSAGE) Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 120 for details. Note “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. Playback Playing video sources in the background of an audio source 3 You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press L SLEEP (or 0 SLEEP) repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press L SLEEP (or 0 SLEEP), the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min. SLEEP OFF Press the input selector buttons (1) on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK SLEEP 90min. SLEEP 30min. SLEEP 60min. The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. Audio sources SLEEP 120min. SLEEP y STRAIGHT Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 87). BASIC OPERATION Flashes Video sources SLEEP Lights up Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 32). 1 2 ■ Cancelling the sleep timer Press L SLEEP (or 0 SLEEP) repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP OFF Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (1)) to select the desired input source. Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the instruction manual for the source component. • See page 54 for details about FM/AM tuning instructions. Disappears The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or 7 STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. English 45 En Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y • The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio sources. • The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • You can change sound field parameters. See page 64 for details. Selecting sound field programs Rotate the N PROGRAM selector (or set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press one of the sound field selector buttons (N) repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43) or when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 52). • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. Sound field program descriptions y Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. Remote control button Category of the program Name of the program MOVIE Sci-Fi Created sound fields CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP MOVIE 8 This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. SUR. DSP LEVEL P.INIT. DLY P.ROOM SIZE S.INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE Available sound field parameters (see page 66) Sound field indicators Presence sound field Listening position Surround left sound field Surround back sound field 46 En Surround right sound field SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Program description Sound field programs ■ For audio music sources y For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 52), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51) or surround decode mode (see page 69). CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 5 7 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich HiFi DSP This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 5 7 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALOG LIFT Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY 5 7 CLASSICAL DIALOG LIFT Hall in Amsterdam HiFi DSP The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 5 7 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALOG LIFT Church in Freiburg BASIC OPERATION CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN ROOM SIZE LIVENESS HiFi DSP Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL 5 LIVENESS REV.TIME CLASSICAL REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALOG LIFT Chamber HiFi DSP This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 6 LIVENESS REV.TIME LIVE/CLUB REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALOG LIFT Village Vanguard HiFi DSP The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the corner. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 6 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALOG LIFT Warehouse Loft HiFi DSP The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy. ROOM SIZE LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALOG LIFT English DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY 47 En Sound field programs LIVE/CLUB 6 LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club HiFi DSP This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 6 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALOG LIFT The Roxy Theatre HiFi DSP This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 6 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALOG LIFT The Bottom Line HiFi DSP This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS DIALOG LIFT ■ For various sources Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. ENTERTAIN 7 ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 7 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 7 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY 48 En P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Sound field programs ■ For visual sources of music Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 6 7 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video HiFi DSP This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 7 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT BASIC OPERATION DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder (SUR.) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 71 for details. Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. MOVIE 8 MOVIE Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. SUR. DSP LEVEL MOVIE 8 S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE MOVIE S. LIVENESS SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE SB LIVENESS DIALOG LIFT Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. SUR. DSP LEVEL MOVIE 8 P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE MOVIE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. SUR. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT English 49 En Sound field programs MOVIE MOVIE 8 Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. SUR. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE MOVIE MOVIE 8 S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. SUR. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE MOVIE MOVIE 8 S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INIT. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALOG LIFT Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS REV.TIME REV. LEVEL REV.DELAY DIALOG LIFT ■ Stereo playback STEREO 9 STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 53 for details. DIRECT STEREO 9 STEREO 7ch Stereo HiFi DSP Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL ■ Compressed Music Enhancer ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts. EFFECT LEVEL ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. EFFECT LEVEL 50 En Sound field programs ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 78), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 46). Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP. Enjoying unprocessed input sources When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode. SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 46). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 53) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode. STRAIGHT y The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the active decoder appear in the front panel display. ■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode BASIC OPERATION ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) Press O STRAIGHT (or H STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. Press O STRAIGHT (or H STRAIGHT) so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. y You can also select desired sound field program by rotating the N PROGRAM selector (or press one of the desired sound field program buttons (N)) repeatedly. English 51 En Using audio features Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP. Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press M PURE DIRECT (or E PURE DIRECT) to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode. The M PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up and the front panel display automatically turns off while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. Notes • When this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, this unit does not output any video signals at the MONITOR OUT jacks and the HDMI OUT jack. • When you set the audio input jack select setting to “AUTO”, “HDMI”, or “COAX/OPT” (see page 43) and play back the bitstreams or multi-channel PCM sources, this unit activates the corresponding decoder. • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker level settings) – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. 52 En Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front L/R and center speaker channels and the subwoofer channel. 1 Press E TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). 2 Rotate the N PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and center speakers and the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when the Pure Direct mode is activated, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input source. Using audio features Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP. Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room” (see page 37) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 79). 1 Press 2 LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Press N STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. y • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 77). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the N PROGRAM selector on the front panel. • See page 69 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo” mode. BASIC OPERATION Display Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker CENTER Center speaker FRONT R Front right speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker SB R Surround back right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SUR.L Surround left speaker SWFR Subwoofer PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker y • Once you press 2 LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing 3k / n. • Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 78). 2 Press 3 l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press 3 h to increase the value. • Press 3 l to decrease the value. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB English 53 En FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 2 Press I FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 1 Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 Press K TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press I FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press K TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. A FM 97.70MHz No colon (:) AUTO Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press H PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press G h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press G l to tune into a lower frequency. 54 En A FM 97.70MHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press H PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. FM/AM tuning Automatic preset tuning Notes You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press I FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. 3 Manual preset tuning Flashes You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. 1 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 54 for tuning instructions. 2 Press J MEMORY on the front panel. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. AUTO MEMORY MEMORY Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y • You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations. Press F A/B/C/D/E and then G PRESET/ TUNING l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. • You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM stations automatically. Press H PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press G PRESET/TUNING l after pressing and holding J MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. BASIC OPERATION Press and hold J MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the AUTO and MEMORY indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. A1:FM 97.70MHz • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning”. • (Europe model only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting station are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. Flashes 3 Press F A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A :FM 97.70MHz Colon (:) MEMORY Flashes Preset station group English 55 En FM/AM tuning 4 Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press G h to select a higher preset station number. • Press G l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. When performing this operation with the remote control, set the operation mode selector to C SOURCE and then press 1 TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. A1:FM 97.70MHz Preset station number 5 MEMORY Press J MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. A1:FM 97.70MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 56 En 1 Press F A/B/C/D/E (or 3 A/B/C/D/E l / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. 2 Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h (or 3 PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. Flashes A1:FM 97.70MHz FM/AM tuning Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using F A/B/C/D/E and G PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 56. 2 Press and hold H EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes 3 Flashes Select preset station “A5” using F A/B/C/D/ E and G PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. A5:FM 97.70MHz Flashes 4 MEMORY BASIC OPERATION E1:FM 97.70MHz MEMORY Flashes Press H EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. EDIT E1-A5 English 57 En Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using the automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 55). • You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station from the preset ones. 2 Press 6FREQ/TEXT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes • You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • You can select only the available Radio Data System display modes being offered by the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, press KTUNING MODE on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. 58 En PS PTY RT CT Frequency display • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “CT” to display the current time. Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode) Use this feature to select the desired radio program by program type from the all preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations. 4 Press 3 PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control to select the desired program type. The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. y Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 55). POP M 1 Lights up 2 Program type Descriptions NEWS News Press 2 BAND repeatedly to select “FM” as the reception band. AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information Press 6 PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK mode. The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Popular music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music NEWS Flashes y To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press 6PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control again. BASIC OPERATION 3 Set the operation mode selector to C SOURCE and then press 1 TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. English 59 En Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) 5 Press 6 PTY SEEK START on the remote control to start searching for all the available Radio Data System preset stations. The name of the selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while this unit is searching for stations. POP M Flashes PTY HOLD Lights up y To stop searching for stations, press 6 PTY SEEK START on the remote control again. Notes • This unit stops searching for stations when a station broadcasting the selected program type is found. • If the station found is not the one you desire, press 6PTY SEEK START again to resume searching for another station broadcasting the same program type. Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data service of the Radio Data System station network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all the available preset stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data service of the selected program type for a certain duration of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this unit automatically switches to the local station broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back to the national station once the EON data service ends. Notes • You can use this feature only when the EON data service is available. • The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data System station. 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. 2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel display, select another Radio Data System program so that the EON indicator lights up. EON 3 Press 6 EON on the remote control repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT). The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. NEWS Lights up y To cancel the EON feature, press 6 EON on the remote control repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display. 60 En Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 31), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 50). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode Controlling iPod™ You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Remote control operation Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C SOURCE and then press 1V-AUX. Button 3 ENTER Function Subsequent menu k Menu up n Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 89). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes hh Search forward (Press and hold) a Skip forward b Skip backward s Stop e Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) p • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) F MENU Previous menu I DISPLAY Display English Search backward (Press and hold) 6 ll BASIC OPERATION • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 122. • Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (on page 87). • While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 34) appears in the front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears. 61 En Using iPod™ Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C SOURCE and then press 1V-AUX. 1 Press I DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings 2 Notes Top > > > > > > > Press 3 k / n / l / h on the remote control to navigate the iPod menu and then press 3 ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. Notes • When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. • Press 3ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of “Shuffle”. 62 En Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. • When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ 1 ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. • Press 3ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of “Repeat”. All ■ The function of the play information display 7 iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia |||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 All 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the artist 3 Name of the album 4 Name of the song 5 Progress bar 6 Elapsed time 7 Shuffle and repeat icons 8 (playback), (pausing), (search backward) 9 Remaining time (search forward) or Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Caution The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • TONE CONTROL (see page 52) and the volume settings, the speaker level (see page 79) and the sound field programs (see page 46) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • The analog audio and video signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks and DVR or VCR OUT jacks for recording. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the C INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (1)) to select the source component you want to record from. 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. English 63 En Advanced sound configurations Changing sound field parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 3 Press one of the sound field program selector buttons (N) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. 4 Press 3 k / n to select the desired sound field parameter and then 3 l / h to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press 3 h to increase the value. • Press 3 l to decrease the value. Note You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 90). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press I PARAMETER on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. Sound field program category MOVIE Cursor . 1/2 Sci-Fi SUR.;;PLIIx Movie DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0 y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 66. • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press 3k / n to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold 3l / h to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. • To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program, press 3n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then press 3h. Once the confirmation screen appears in the OSD, press 3h to confirm or 3l to cancel the initialization. MOVIE [p]/[[]: Select 2/2 Sci-Fi SB INIT.DLY;;15ms SB ROOM SIZE ;;1.0 DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0 . INITIALIZE Sound field parameters Sound field parameter values [[]: Initialize 5 Press I PARAMETER to turn off the sound field parameter display. SYSTEM MEMORY feature You can save multiple customized sound field parameter settings by using the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See page 93 for details. 64 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Basic configuration of sound field programs Each sound field program has some parameters defining the characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/ or “DIALOG LIFT” first, and then try other parameters. Adjusting the vertical dialogue position (DIALOG LIFT) Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. y To change sound field parameter settings, see page 64 for details. Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field programs (DSP LEVEL) Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to adjust the level of the effect sounds. The DSP effect sound level is low. The DSP effect sound level is high. Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when • the effect sound of the selected sound field program is too weak. • you cannot recognize any difference between the sound field programs. If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALOG LIFT”. Move up to the ideal dialogue position. Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 “0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the highest position. Notes ADVANCED OPERATION Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows: The ideal dialogue position • “DIALOG LIFT” is available only when “PRESENCE SP” is set to “ON” (see page 78). • You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position. Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when • the sound is vague. • you feel that the additional sound effect is excessive. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB English 65 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 64 for details. Sound field parameter INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INIT.DLY Features Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener. y When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INIT.DLY) Source sound Level Level Level Early reflections Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms 66 En Large value = 99 ms Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. y When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. ADVANCED OPERATION Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Live Level LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 English 67 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s REV.DELAY 60 dB Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Level Control range: 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.LEVEL REV.TIME Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound REV. LEVEL Time 68 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter DIRECT (“2ch Stereo” only) Features 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 52). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. • When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 77). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 77) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 77). CT SL SR SB PL PR LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% (“7ch Stereo” only) EFFECT LEVEL (“Straight Enhancer” and “7ch Enhancer” only) Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. Selecting decoders ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. y You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press I PARAMETER and then 3k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the selected parameter by pressing 3l / h repeatedly on the remote control. Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press K SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote control to select the surround decode mode. You can select the desired surround decoder mode depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. English 69 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Decoder descriptions Remote control button SUR.DECODE +10 Name of the decoder (SUR.) Category and name of the program PLIIxMusic PLIIMusic SUR. DECODE Sur. Decode Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH Available decoder parameters (see page 71) SUR.DECODE +10 SUR. DECODE Sur. Decode Program description PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. SUR.DECODE +10 SUR. DECODE Sur. Decode PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/ R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). SUR.DECODE +10 SUR. DECODE Sur. Decode PLIIx Music PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/ R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). PANORAMA SUR.DECODE +10 DIMENSION SUR. DECODE Sur. Decode CENTER WIDTH PLIIx Game PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). SUR.DECODE +10 SUR. DECODE Sur. Decode Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. SUR.DECODE +10 SUR. DECODE Sur. Decode Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. C. IMAGE y When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the corresponding decoder for each source. 70 En Advanced sound configurations Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter PANORAMA (“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music” only) Features Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF, ON DIMENSION (“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music” only) Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) CENTER WIDTH (“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music” only) Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 C.IMAGE (“Neo:6 Music” only) DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to 1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker) Initial setting: 0.3 ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs (SUR.) Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field program. Available decoders Decoder Functions PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources English 71 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 37). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU Menu Functions Page LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. 77 FRONT SP Selects the size of the front speakers. 77 CENTER SP Selects the size of the center speaker. 77 SUR. L/R SP Selects the size and number of the surround speakers. 78 SUR.B L/R SP Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers. 78 PRESENCE SP Selects whether this unit uses the presence speakers. 78 CROSS OVER Selects the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 77 and 78). 78 SUBWOOFER PHASE Switches the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. 79 PRIORITY Prioritizes either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing back sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. 79 B)SPEAKER LEVEL FR.L/FR.R/ CENT./SUR.L/ SUR.R/SB L/SB R/ SWFR/PR.L/PR.R Adjust the balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). 79 C)SP DISTANCE UNIT Selects the unit to adjust the speaker distance. 80 FRONT L/FRONT R/ CENTER/SUR. L/ SUR. R/SB L/SB R/SWFR/PRNS L/ PRNS R Adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. 80 Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings. 80 A)SPEAKER SET D)TEST TONE 72 En Parameter — Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Volume menu 2 VOLUME MENU Parameter Functions Page ADAPTIVE DRC Selects whether this unit automatically adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level or not. 81 ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL Selects whether this unit adjusts the DSP effect level automatically in conjunction with the volume level or not. 81 MUTING TYPE Adjusts how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 44). 81 MAX VOL. Sets the maximum volume level of the main zone. 81 INIT. VOL. Sets the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. 81 Sound menu 3 SOUND MENU Menu A)EQUALIZER E)AUDIO SET F)HDMI SET Page EQ TYPE SELECT Selects the type of equalizer. 82 GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the speakers when you set “EQ TYPE SELECT” to “GEQ”. 82 TEST Selects whether this unit outputs the test tone while making adjustments of “GEQ” or not. 82 SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. 83 HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. 83 Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the speakers. 83 HEADPHONE Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the headphones. 83 HDMI AUTO Selects whether this unit activates the automatic audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip sync) or not. 84 AUTO DELAY Makes fine adjustments of the audio delay when the automatic audio and video synchronization function is active. 84 MANUAL DELAY Adjustment the audio delay manually when the connected video monitor is not compatible with the automatic audio and video synchronization function or “HDMI AUTO” is set to “OFF”. 84 EXTD SUR. Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected surround back speakers. 84 TONE BYPASS Selects whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52). 84 SUPPORT AUDIO Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. 85 C)DYNAMIC RANGE SPEAKER D)LIPSYNC Functions ADVANCED OPERATION B)LFE LEVEL Parameter English 73 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Input menu 4 INPUT MENU Note Some parameters described below may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input sources. Parameter Functions Page I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. 86 INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. 86 VOL. TRIM Adjusts the level of the signal input at each jack. 86 DECODER MODE Switches the decoder activation mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for DTS signals. 86 STANDBY CHARGE Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 61). 87 BGV Selects the video source played back in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 87 INPUT CH Selects the number of channels input from an external decoder. 87 FRONT Selects the analog jacks at which the front channel signals from an external decoder are input when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. 87 Option menu 5 OPTION MENU Menu A)DISPLAY SET 74 En Parameter Functions Page DIMMER Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 88 OSD SHIFT Adjusts the vertical position of the OSD. 88 GRAY BACK Selects whether this unit displays a gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. 88 SHORT MESSAGE Selects whether this unit displays the short messages on the video monitor after you perform a certain operation. 88 ON SCREEN Sets the time for which the iPod menu is displayed in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. 88 FL SCROLL Selects the mode to display the information of your iPod in the front panel display. 89 Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Menu B)VIDEO SET Parameter Selects whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. 89 COMPONENT I/P Selects whether this unit activates the analog interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks. 89 HDMI SCALING Selects whether this unit activates the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-scaled analog video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack. 89 HDMI ASPECT Adjusts the aspect ratio for analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack. 90 Prevents accidental changes to sound field program parameter values and other system settings. 90 AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 91 DECODER MODE Designates the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 91 EXTD SUR. Designates the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 91 AMP Selects how the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers are amplified. 91 VOLUME Selects whether this unit controls the volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks. 92 MAX VOL. Adjusts the maximum volume level in Zone 2 or Zone 3. 92 INIT. VOL. Sets the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 when you turn on the power of this unit. 92 — ADVANCED OPERATION E)ZONE SET Page VIDEO CONV. C)MEMORY GUARD D)INIT. CONFIG Functions ■ System memory SYSTEM MEMORY Use this feature to create your favorite settings and assign the settings to each M SYSTEM MEMORY button (see page 93). ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 44). English 75 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press I PARAMETER during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press 4 RETURN to return to the previous menu level. 1 2 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press F SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. Press 3 k / n repeatedly and then press 3 ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. 3 SOUND MENU . A)EQUALIZER B)LFE LEVEL C)DYNAMIC RANGE D)LIPSYNC E)AUDIO SET F)HDMI SET [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter 5 Press 3 k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. p Using SET MENU Press 3 k / n repeatedly and then press 3 ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “LFE LEVEL” is selected. SET MENU B)LFE LEVEL ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB ;SYSTEM MEMORY ;SIGNAL INFO HEADPHONE;;-20dB 3 p Press 3 ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. 6 Press 3 k / n to select the desired parameter and then 3 l / h to change the parameter settings. • Press 3 h to increase the value. • Press 3 l to decrease the value. 7 Press F SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. MANUAL SETUP . 1 BASIC MENU 2 3 4 5 VOLUME MENU SOUND MENU INPUT MENU OPTION MENU 76 En p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter p []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Adjust [ [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 1 BASIC MENU Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker settings. Most of the “BASIC MENU” parameters are set automatically when you run the automatic setup. 1 BASIC MENU Measure for the speaker size The woofer section of a speaker is – 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large – smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE . A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)TEST TONE A)SPEAKER SET FRONT SP p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter SMALL y Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL” and “SP DISTANCE”. ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH A)SPEAKER SET LFE/BASS OUT When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound: Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound: Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. When the front speakers are small: Select “SMALL” (small). Notes • When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, the LFE signals found in bitstream sources, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. • When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the value to “LARGE” automatically. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SMALL, LARGE A)SPEAKER SET CENTER SP NONE >SMALL LARGE When the center speaker is large: Select “LARGE” (large). When the center speaker is small: Select “SMALL” (small). When you do not use the center speaker: Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. English When you do not use a subwoofer: Select “FRONT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. When the front speakers are large: Select “LARGE” (large). ADVANCED OPERATION SWFR FRONT>BOTH >LARGE 77 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) When you do not use the surround back speakers: Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. Measure for the speaker size The woofer section of a speaker is – 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large – smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMALL, LARGE y See page 17 for the connection information of the surround back speakers. A)SPEAKER SET Notes SUR. L/R SP NONE >SMALL If the Dolby TrueHD audio signals are input and “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE”, the left and right surround back channels are not directed to the surround left and right speakers. LARGE When the surround speakers are large: Select “LARGE” (large). When the surround speakers are small: Select “SMALL” (small). Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers connected to this unit. Choices: NONE, YES A)SPEAKER SET When you do not use the surround speakers: Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 51), and “SUR.B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. PRESENCE SP y NONE See page 17 for the connection information of the surround back speakers. When you do not use the presence speakers: Select “NONE” (none). Surround back left/right speakers SUR.B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 A)SPEAKER SET SUR.B L/R SP NONE SMLx1 >SMLx2 When the surround back left and right speakers are large: Select “LRGx2” (large x 2). When the single surround back speaker is large: Select “LRGx1” (large x 1). >YES When you use the presence speakers: Select “YES” (yes). Note “DIALOG LIFT” is available only when “PRESENCE SP” is set to “YES”. Bass cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz When the surround back left and right speakers are small: Select “SMLx2” (small x 2). A)SPEAKER SET CROSS OVER When the single surround back speaker is small: Select “SMLx1” (small x 1). FREQ;;;;80Hz y If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. 78 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. A)SPEAKER SET SUBWOOFER PHASE >NORMAL ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB CENT./SUR.L/SUR.R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB REVERSE B)SPEAKER LEVEL Choice Functions NORMAL (normal) Does not change the phase of your subwoofer. REVERSE (reverse) Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse. Presence/surround back channel priority PRIORITY Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing back 2-channel audio sources using the sound field programs. 1/2 B)SPEAKER LEVEL . FR.L . SB L FR.R CENT. SUR.L SUR.R SPEAKER LEVEL 2/2 SB R SWFR PR.L PR.R Adjusted speaker FR.L Front left speaker FR.R Front right speaker CENT. Center speaker SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SB R Surround back right speaker SWFR Subwoofer PR.L Presence left speaker PR.R Presence right speaker A)SPEAKER SET PRIORITY Choice Functions PRNS Uses the presence speakers. SUR.B Uses the surround back speakers. y For details about the sound output from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to “Sound output in each sound field program” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual. ADVANCED OPERATION PRNS >SUR.B y • If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. • Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the “SPEAKER LEVEL” setting (see page 80). Notes • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/ R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 78). English 79 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE y Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. C)SP DISTANCE 1/2 C)SP DISTANCE . UNIT;;;;;;meters . SB L;;;;;;;;2.40m []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Adjust p [ SB R;;;;;;;;2.40m SWFR;;;;;;;;3.00m PRNS L;;;;;;3.00m PRNS R;;;;;;3.00m p • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 78). 2/2 FRONT L;;;;3.00m FRONT R;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;2.60m SUR. L;;;;;2.40m SUR. R;;;;;2.40m [ Notes ■ Test tone D)TEST TONE Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings. D)TEST TONE Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) Choice ON [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return Functions meters (m) Adjusts speaker distances in meters. feet (ft) Adjusts speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/ PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft) SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SB R Surround back right speaker SWFR Subwoofer PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker 80 En >OFF Choice Functions OFF This unit does not output the test tone for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings. ON This unit outputs the test tone for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings. y If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. Note This function is automatically turned off if you exit “BASIC MENU”. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 2 VOLUME MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume settings. Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP effect level (see page 65) automatically in conjunction with the volume level. Choice 2 VOLUME MENU AUTO OFF Does not adjust the DSP effect level automatically. . ADAPTIVE DRC;;;;OFF ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL;;;;OFF MUTING TYPE;;;;FULL MAX VOL.;;;;+16.5dB INIT. VOL.;;;;;;OFF Functions Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with the volume level. p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select Note Output level AUTO OFF Input level OFF Input level VOLUME: low Choice AUTO VOLUME: high Functions AUTO Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. OFF Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. y • You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 83). • This function is also useful for listening with your headphones. Note The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 52). Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this unit does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP LEVEL” (see page 65). Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 44). Choice Functions FULL Mutes all the audio output. –20dB Reduces the current volume by 20 dB. Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB. Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB Control step: 5.0 dB ADVANCED OPERATION Output level Adaptive dynamic range control ADAPTIVE DRC Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When “ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls the dynamic range as follows: – If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is narrow – If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide Notes • When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX VOL.” setting. • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. • Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE SET” to set the initial volume level in Zone 2 or Zone 3. Initial volume INIT. VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume setting. 81 En English Note Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters. 3 SOUND MENU . A)EQUALIZER B)LFE LEVEL C)DYNAMIC RANGE D)LIPSYNC E)AUDIO SET F)HDMI SET Graphic equalizer GEQ Use this feature to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R, surround back, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer with that of the front L/R speakers. You can adjust 7 frequency bands (63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz). Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter A)EQUALIZER A)EQUALIZER 1/2 Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT Use this feature to select the type of equalizer. . 2.5kHz 6.3kHz 16kHz 0dB 0dB 0dB []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Adjust [ [ Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the graphic equalizer. 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1kHz []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select ■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER 2/2 TEST >OFF ON CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L TEST >OFF ON . CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L p 3 SOUND MENU y Press 3 k / n to select a frequency band and 3 l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. A)EQUALIZER OFF [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Enter Functions AUTO PEQ Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 37). GEQ Adjusts the built-in 7-frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speakers matches. Press 3 ENTER to display the graphic equalizer screen. OFF The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”. Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while listening to a test tone. To select “TEST”, press 3k / n repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen. A)EQUALIZER 1/2 . TEST >OFF ON CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1kHz []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select Deactivates the equalizing feature. [ Choice Note 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p EQ TYPE SELECT AUTO PEQ >GEQ [NATURAL] y Currently applied parametric equalizer type (see page 40) appears under “AUTO PEQ”. Choice OFF Does not output test tones and output the currently selected source component. ON Outputs test tones from the selected speakers. Note You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 37). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting. 82 En Functions Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Low-frequency effect level ■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE B)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes bitstream signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding bitstream signals. C)DYNAMIC RANGE SPEAKER;;;;;;;;;MAX . HEADPHONE;;;;;;;MAX p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select B)LFE LEVEL . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Adjust Speakers SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Speakers SPEAKER Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers. Headphones HEADPHONE Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the headphones. Choice Headphones HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. • MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow when this unit is decoding bitstream signals (except Dolby TrueHD). • AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according to the instruction of the input source signals when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals. STD Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range control is always active regardless of the instruction of the input source signals. MAX Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range. ADVANCED OPERATION MIN/AUTO Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 77), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack. Functions English 83 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Audio and video synchronization (Lip sync) D)LIPSYNC ■ Audio settings E)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the audio and video synchronization. E)AUDIO SET . EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO TONE BYPASS;;;;AUTO D)LIPSYNC . HDMI AUTO;;;;;;OFF p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select HDMI Automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the automatic lip sync. Choices: ON, OFF If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic lip sync: Select “ON”. Use “AUTO DELAY” to make fine adjustments of the audio and video synchronization. If the video monitor is not compatible with the automatic lip sync or you do not want to use the automatic lip sync: Select “OFF”. Use “MANUAL DELAY” to adjust the audio and video synchronization. Auto delay AUTO DELAY Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to “ON”. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select AUTO DELAY;;;---ms (offset;;;---ms) MANUAL DELAY;;;0ms Extended surround EXTD SUR. Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected surround back speakers. Choice Functions AUTO Activates the optimum decoder to play back signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit recognizes a signal flag being input. PLIIxMovie Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. EX Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. OFF Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1 channels. Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52). y “offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio delay that you set in “AUTO DELAY”. This unit stores the value of “offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync compatible video monitors. Manual delay MANUAL DELAY Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output manually to synchronize audio with video images when you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms 84 En Choice Functions AUTO Automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB. OFF Does not bypass the tone control circuitry. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) F)HDMI SET SUPPORT AUDIO RX-V1800 4 INPUT MENU Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input source. 4 INPUT MENU . A) Choice RX-V1800 OTHER Functions Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Plays back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. • This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI input jacks to the HDMI OUT jack only when this unit is turned on even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”. • Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. Input source 4 INPUT MENU . H) I) J) K) L) M) 2/2 DVD DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX DOCK []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter Parameter A)TUNER INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM B)MULTI CH INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM BGV INPUT CH FRONT C)PHONO D)CD E)CD-R F)MD/TAPE G)BD/HD DVD H)DVD I)DTV/CBL J)DVR K)VCR L)V-AUX I/O ASSIGNMENT INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM DECODER MODE M)DOCK INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM STANDBY CHARGE ADVANCED OPERATION Notes p [ [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. 1/2 TUNER B) MULTI CH C) PHONO D) CD E) CD-R F) MD/TAPE G) BD/HD DVD []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter p Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. [ ■ HDMI set F)HDMI SET Note Some parameters described above may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input sources. English 85 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) DVR Notes • You can use up to 9 characters for each input. • Press 3 n to change the character in the following order, or press 3 k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space. 3 Repeat steps 1 through 2 to rename each input source. 4 Press 3 ENTER to complete. . COMPONENT IN;;;[C]* COAXIAL IN;;;;;(3) OPTICAL IN;;;;NONE OPTICAL OUT;;;NONE HDMI IN;;;;;;;;[4] Current ( DTV/CBL ) [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Enter y • “NONE” appears in the OSD when any input source is not assigned to the input/output jack. • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the input/output jack names that have been changed from their previous settings. • The currently assigned input source for the selected input/ output jack appears in the OSD (“Current ( DTV/CBL )” in the display example above). Press 3k / n to select the character you want to use and then press 3l / h to move to the next space. Volume trim VOL. TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB A) Input rename INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. A) . TUNER p [p]/[[]: Position [ ]/[ ]: Character [ENTER]: Enter [RETURN]: Return [ [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Adjust y TUNER INPUT RENAME TUNER y This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio ZONE OUT jacks. Decoder mode DECODER MODE Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for DTS signals. You can also change the name of the input source that appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. Refer to “Changing source names in the display window” on page 102. D) Press 3l / h to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select Choice 86 En CD I/O ASSIGNMENT INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB . DECODER MODE;;;AUTO [ 1 TUNER INPUT RENAME . VOL. TRIM;;;;+6.0dB p J) 2 p Input/output assignment I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the C INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Functions AUTO Automatically detects digital audio signal input types and selects the appropriate decoder. DTS Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio signals are input. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 61). Choice Input channels INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder (see page 30). Choice: 6CH, 8CH Functions B) MULTI CH Multi-channel input BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. B) MULTI CH INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB . BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH Choice p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Select Functions Automatically selects the last selected video source as the background video source. BD/HD DVD, DTV/CBL, DVD, DVR, VCR, V-AUX Selects the corresponding input source as the background video source. OFF Does not play the video source in the background. p If the connected component outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals: Select “6CH”. If the connected component outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals: Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel signals output from the connected component are input. Note If “AMP” is set to “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” or “BOTH” (see page 91), no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8CH”. In this case, select “6CH” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. Front left and right channels input jack FRONT If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel signals output from the connected external decoder is input. Choices: CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, BD/HD DVD, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX ADVANCED OPERATION LAST []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Select [ Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. B) MULTI CH INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUT CH;;;;;;;;8CH . FRONT;;;;;BD/HD DVD []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Select p OFF INPUT RENAME VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST . INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH [ AUTO Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. Note “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. English 87 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 5 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. Choice 5 OPTION MENU AUTO Displays a gray background on your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. OFF Does not display a gray background on your video monitor. . A)DISPLAY SET B)VIDEO SET C)MEMORY GUARD D)INIT. CONFIG E)ZONE SET p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET Note Use “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set “OSD SHIFT” and “GRAY BACK” to the factory presets (see page 116). Functions Notes • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. A)DISPLAY SET . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;+5 GRAY BACK;;;;;;AUTO SHORT MESSAGE;;;;ON ON SCREEN;;;;ALWAYS FL SCROLL;;;;;;CONT p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Adjust Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press 3 l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press 3 h to make the front panel display brighter. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press 3 l to lower the position of the OSD. • Press 3 h to raise the position of the OSD. Short message display SHORT MESSAGE Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display function. Choice ON Activates the short message display function. The contents of the front panel display appear at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. OFF Deactivates the short message display function. Note The short message display does not appear in the following cases: – when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input – When HDMI video signals are input On-screen display time ON SCREEN Use this feature to set the time for which the iPod menu is displayed in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choice 88 En Functions Functions ALWAYS Displays the OSD unceasingly during an operation. 10S Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. 30S Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set the mode to display the iPod menu (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display. Choice Functions CONT Continuous mode. Select this to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. ONCE Scroll-once mode. Select this to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. Component interlace/progressive up-conversion COMPONENT I/P Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks. Choice Functions ON Activates the analog interlace/progressive upconversion of the analog video signals. OFF Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive upconversion of the analog video signals. ■ Video settings B)VIDEO SET Notes B)VIDEO SET . VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON COMPONENT I/P;;;OFF HDMI SCALING;;;480p HDMI ASPECT;;;THRGH p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select Choice Functions ON Converts composite, S-video, and component video signals interchangeably and up-converts composite, S-video, and component video signals to HDMI video signals. OFF Does not convert any signals. HDMI scaling HDMI SCALING Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI upscaling of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the upscaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack. This unit up-scales the video signals as follows: • 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p or 1080p • 480p/576p → 1080i, 720p or 1080p Choice ADVANCED OPERATION Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • The “COMPONENT I/P” parameter appears only when you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. • If your video monitor does not support analog video signals with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be displayed on your video monitor when “COMPONENT I/P” is set to “ON”. In such a case, set the “COMPONENT I/P” parameter to “OFF”. Functions THROUGH Does not up-scale any analog video signals. 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p, 1080p Up-scales analog video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution. Notes Note This unit does not up-scale the analog component video signals with 720p or1080i of resolution. English • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted into component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the sound field parameter display and short message display. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. 89 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Memory guard C)MEMORY GUARD Notes • The “HDMI SCALING” parameter appears only when you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. • If you connect your video monitor via HDMI connection, this unit automatically detects the available video signal resolution of the video monitor, and an asterisk (*) appears on the left of the available video signal resolution(s). • If this unit cannot detect the available video signal resolution(s) of the connected video monitor, set “MONITOR CHECK” (see page 116) to “SKIP” and then set “HDMI SCALING” again. • This unit does not convert between 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals. HDMI aspect ratio HDMI ASPECT Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack. Choice Does not make any adjustments to the aspect ratio for the HDMI video signal sources. 16:9 Displays video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and left sides as a result. Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. Notes • When “HDMI SCALING” is set to “THROUGH”, you cannot make any adjustments to “HDMI ASPECT”. • If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this unit automatically ignores the setting of “HDMI ASPECT”. • When “HDMI ASPECT” is set to “SMART”, the video images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched. • When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the signals are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, the setting of “HDMI ASPECT” does not affect the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack. 90 En C)MEMORY GUARD >OFF ON [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return Choice Functions OFF Turns off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. ON Protects: – sound field program parameters – “AUTO SETUP” items – “SYSTEM MEMORY” (“SAVE”) – all speaker levels – “MANUAL SETUP” items Functions THROUGH SMART Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound field program parameter and other system settings. Notes • You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”: – “AUDIO SET” parameters (see page 84) – “DECODER MODE” (see page 86) – “MEMORY GUARD” • When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, “ G ” appears at the top right of the “SET MENU” screen. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Initial configuration D)INIT. CONFIG ■ Zone set E)ZONE SET Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input jack select, active decoders and extended surround when you turn on this unit. Use this feature to set the items related in Zone 2 or Zone 3. E)ZONE SET D)INIT. CONFIG . >ZONE2 DECODER MODE;;AUTO EXTD SUR.;;;;;AUTO Choice AUTO LAST Functions Automatically detects the type of audio input signals and selects the appropriate audio input jack select setting. Automatically selects the last audio input jack select setting used for the connected input source. Choice Functions AUTO Automatically detects the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode setting. LAST Automatically selects the last decoder mode setting used for the connected input source. Extended surround EXTD SUR. Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode (see page 84) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choice Functions AUTO Automatically detects the digital audio input signals and activates the appropriate decoder. LAST Automatically selects the last decoder mode set for “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU”. Setting zone Select the zone to set up “AMP”, “VOLUME”, “MAX VOL.” and “INIT. VOL.”. Choice Functions ZONE2 Sets the “ZONE SET” parameters for Zone 2. ZONE3 Sets the “ZONE SET” parameters for Zone 3. Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier AMP Use this feature to select how the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers are amplified. This parameter also effects the speaker settings and the sound output of sound field programs in the main zone. Choices: EXT, [SP1], [SP2], BOTH When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 are connected to the external amplifier, and the external amplifier is connected to the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks of this unit: Select “EXT”. See “Using external amplifiers” on page 108 for details. ADVANCED OPERATION Decoder mode DECODER MODE Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode (see page 86) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [p]/[[]: Select [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return Audio select AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting (see page 43) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. ZONE3 AMP;;;;;;;;;;;;EXT VOLUME;;;;;;;;;VAR MAX VOL.;;;-30.0dB INIT. VOL.;+16.5dB . AUDIO SELECT;;AUTO Note When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 116), you can only set “AMP” to “EXT” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3”. When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 is connected to the SP1 speaker terminals of this unit directly: Select “[SP1]”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of this unit” on page 109 for details. Note When you set “AMP” to “[SP1]” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from the surround back speakers. English 91 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 is connected to the SP2 speaker terminals of this unit directly: Select “[SP2]”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of this unit” on page 109 for details. Note When you set “AMP” to “[SP2]” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from the surround speakers. If the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 are connected to both the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals (for example, the speakers are connected via the bi-amplifier connection, or there are four speakers in a room) or if you want to play back the same source in Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously: Select “BOTH”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of this unit” on page 109 for details. Notes • When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3”, you can only set “AMP” to “EXT” in the other zone setting. • When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from both the surround and surround back speakers. Zone 2/Zone 3 volume VOLUME Use this feature to select whether this unit controls the volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks when you set “AMP” to “EXT” (see page 91). Choices: VAR, FIX When you want to control the volume level of the selected zone on this unit: Select “VAR”. You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with B VOLUME +/– on the remote control. When you want to control the volume level of the selected zone on the external amplifier: Select “FIX”. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard line level. Zone 2/Zone 3 maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2 or Zone 3. Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.” setting. For example, “INIT. VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume INIT. VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 when the power of Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on. Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.” setting. 92 En Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY) Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save the following system setting parameters: Saved parameters Page “BASIC MENU” parameters (except “TEST TONE”) 77 “VOLUME MENU” parameters (except “INIT. VOL.”) 81 “SOUND MENU” parameters* (except “EXTD SUR.”) 82 “DISPLAY SET” parameters (except “SHORT MESSAGE”) 88 “VIDEO SET” parameters 89 Currently selected sound field program (or the Pure Direct mode) 46 Sound field parameter settings 64 Tonal quality control settings* 52 ■ Saving by the SET MENU operation You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1” to “MEMORY6” by using the “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu in “SET MENU”. 1 Press F SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. o SET MENU ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP ;SYSTEM MEMORY ;SIGNAL INFO 2 * The settings of “DYNAMIC RANGE”, “LFE LEVEL”, and the tonal quality control for headphones are not saved. p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter Press 3n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and then press 3 ENTER. The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears in the OSD. SYSTEM MEMORY ADVANCED OPERATION . 1 LOAD 2 SAVE Saving the current system settings ■ Saving by the MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1” to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons. 3 p [ []/[]: UP/DOWN [ENTER]: Enter Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP. Press 3n to select “SAVE” and then press 3 ENTER. The following menu appears in the OSD. SYSTEM MEMORY . SAVE;;;;;;;CURRENT Press and hold one of the MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds. “MEMORY 1 SAVE Done” (example) appears in the front panel display, and then this unit saves the current system setting to the corresponding memory number. Church in Freiburg ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ YPAO PEQ;;;NATURAL [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return Current system parameters SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 4 Note If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit overwrites the old system settings. English 93 En Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY) 4 Press 3 l / h repeatedly to select the desired memory number (“MEMORY1” to “MEMORY6”). 1 SYSTEM MEMORY Press one of the M SYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the remote control to select the desired memory number. “MEMORY 1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front panel display. . SAVE;;;;;;;MEMORY1 SYSTEM MEMORY Drama ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO EQUALIZER;;;;;;GEQ YPAO PEQ;;;;;;NONE 1 [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return • If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, the stored system parameter settings appear in the menu screen. “EMPTY” appears in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the selected memory number. • If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit overwrite the old system settings. • If you save the system settings to “MEMORY1” to “MEMORY4”, you can load the stored settings by pressing the corresponding MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons (see page 94). 5 Press 3 ENTER to save the current system settings to the selected memory number. 6 Press F SET MENU again to exit from “SET MENU”. 3 4 y “EMPTY” appears in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the selected memory number. Stored system parameters in the selected memory number y 2 2 Press the selected M SYSTEM MEMORY button once more to confirm the selection. This unit loads the settings stored in the selected memory number. ■ Loading by the SET MENU operation 1 Press F SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 2 Press 3 n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and then press 3 ENTER. The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears in the OSD. 3 Press 3 ENTER to select “LOAD”. The following menu appears in the OSD. SYSTEM MEMORY . LOAD;;;;;;;CURRENT Loading the stored system settings Church in Freiburg ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ YPAO PEQ;;;NATURAL • Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP. • This unit overwrites the stored settings to the current settings of this unit. If you do not want to erase the current settings, save the current settings to any SYSTEM MEMORY number in advance. [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Return 4 ■ Loading by the M SYSTEM MEMORY buttons You can recall the system settings stored in “MEMORY1” to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding M SYSTEM MEMORY buttons. Press 3 l / h repeatedly to select the desired memory number where the system settings are stored and then press 3 ENTER. This unit loads the selected system settings. SYSTEM MEMORY . LOAD;;;;;;;MEMORY6 Straight ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ YPAO PEQ;;;;;;FLAT [p]/[[]: Select [ENTER]: Load 5 94 En Press F SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY) ■ Example 2: Switching the settings for different room environments Using examples ■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the automatic setup and manual setup This unit is equipped with three types of parametric equalizer settings (see page 40), and you can also make your customized configuration of the sound settings of this unit by using the “MANUAL SETUP” parameters (see page 72). To compare the results of the automatic setup or your manual configuration, use the MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons. The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary depending on the situations of the room (for example, whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the room. You can switch between the settings of this unit easily by using MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons. SYSTEM MEMORY 1 The settings when the curtains of the listening room are closed SYSTEM MEMORY 1 The current settings of this unit SYSTEM MEMORY 1 SYSTEM MEMORY 2 The results of the automatic setup (EQ: NATURAL) 5 2 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 6 7 3 6 7 4 MOVIE 8 SYSTEM MEMORY 2 The settings when the curtains of the listening room are open SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 4 MOVIE 8 Saving each setting SYSTEM MEMORY 3 The results of the automatic setup (EQ: FRONT) Close the curtains of the listening room and then perform the automatic setup. See page 37 for details of the automatic setup. 2 Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 1 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the settings for the current room situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to “MEMORY1”. 3 Open the curtains of the listening room and the perform the automatic setup. 4 Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the curtains are open) to “MEMORY2”. Saving each setting Note Carry out the following procedure when all the parameters are set to default values. 1 Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 1 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the current settings of this unit to “MEMORY1”. Perform the automatic setup. Set “EQ” to “NATURAL”. See page 40 for details. 3 Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 2 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the results of the automatic setup performed in step 2 to “MEMORY2”. 4 Perform the automatic setup again. This time, set “EQ” to “FRONT”. 5 Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 3 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the results of the automatic setup performed in step 4 to “MEMORY3”. English 2 ADVANCED OPERATION 1 95 En Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY) ■ Example 3: Saving the sound configurations for specific sources ■ Example 4: Switching multiple audio and video synchronization settings The desired sound configurations are different for each input source. For example, if you use the sound field program “Village Vanguard” for a music source of a live jazz performance, the parameter settings may differ when the input source is a vinyl record or an SACD. You can store the sound settings for each input source. If you use two different kinds of video monitors or projectors, and these components are not compatible with the automatic audio and video synchronization feature, you should set “MANUAL DELAY” for each component. You can switch between the different “MANUAL DELAY” settings by using the MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons. SYSTEM MEMORY 1 The “Village Vanguard” program configured for the SACD sources SYSTEM MEMORY 1 The settings for the LCD video monitor connected to the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack SYSTEM MEMORY 1 2 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 6 7 4 SYSTEM MEMORY 1 MOVIE 8 5 SYSTEM MEMORY 2 The “Village Vanguard” program configured for the vinyl record sources Saving each setting 2 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 6 7 4 MOVIE 8 SYSTEM MEMORY 2 The settings for the video projector connected to the HDMI OUT jack Saving each setting y See page 64 for the sound field program parameter settings. 1 Start playback of the desired live jazz performance recorded on the SACD. 2 Set the sound field program to “Village Vanguard” and then adjust the parameters for the current playback sources. 3 Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 1 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the current sound field program settings to “MEMORY1”. 4 Change the input source to “PHONO” and then start playback of the desired live jazz performance recorded on the vinyl record. 5 Adjust the sound field program parameters for the current playback source. 6 Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the current sound field program settings to “MEMORY2”. 96 En Note In the following example, the LCD video monitor and one input component (for example, VCR) are connected to the S VIDEO input jack and S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, and the video projector and the other input component (for example, DVD player) are connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and HDMI OUT jack. 1 Start playback of the desired video source on the connected LCD video monitor and then adjust “MANUAL DELAY” in “SOUND MENU” appropriately (see page 84). 2 Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the audio and video synchronization settings for the LCD video monitor to “MEMORY 1”. 3 Change the input source to the component connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and then start playback. 4 Adjust “MANUAL DELAY” in “SOUND MENU” appropriately. 5 Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for 4 seconds. This unit stores the audio and video synchronization settings for the video projector to “MEMORY 2”. Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 99). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the operation mode selector to C AMP to control this unit. Set the operation mode selector to C TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO in advance (see page 99). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MULTI CH IN TUNER CD CD-R MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD DTV/CBL DVR VCR *1 *1 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MULTI CH IN TUNER CD CD-R PHONO MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO V-AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK SELECT SELECT AMP AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME Set to AMP SOURCE – – TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH PURE DIRECT + + CH VOLUME *1 *1 – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND SRCH MODE PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT PARAMETER *1 2 3 7 6 EFFECT SYSTEM MEMORY 8 0 FREQ/TEXT EON + 10 *2 5 7 6 4 MOVIE 8 STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON ENT MODE – PTY SEEK – START + 10 ENT *2 MODE – PTY SEEK – START REC REC ON 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN DISC SKIP DISC SKIP OFF 2 1 4 MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 9 STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN SYSTEM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 AUDIO A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E 1 PURE DIRECT ENTER AUDIO Set to TV TV SET MENU TITLE BAND ENTER *2 SOURCE TV SET MENU + TV VOL ADVANCED OPERATION – TV MUTE *2 MACRO LEARN CLEAR OFF RENAME ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Notes Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to C AMP. *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. 97 En English *2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to C TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 98. Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Set the operation mode selector to C SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons (1) or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 99). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button (1) or . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. TV MUTE [1] POWER POWER TV AV TUNER CD MD/TAPE DVD STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR [2] CH + CH – Power *1 MUTE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN [8] [9] AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E [10] EFFECT 2 1 [6] 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 7 6 4 MOVIE 8 STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SELECT [2] The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 14 different components. AV POWER TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE BAND V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON + 10 ENT [11] MODE – PTY SEEK – START AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE [1] LEVEL SYSTEM MEMORY y Blu-ray Disc/ DVD player/ HD DVD DVD player/ recorder recorder [3] [4] [5] LEVEL [7] REC DISC SKIP TV OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Set to SOURCE PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER PURE DIRECT AUDIO VCR Cable TV/ Satellite tuner TV LD player CD player MD recorder/ Tape deck CD recorder Tuner Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 DVR power Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 Channel up Channel up Channel up TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 Channel down Channel down Channel down TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 Title *2 [3] TITLE Title Title Title Title [4] ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu select Menu select PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) A/B/C/D/E l Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left Preset down (A to E) A/B/C/D/E h Menu right Menu right Menu right Menu right Band Direction A/B [5] RETURN Return Return Return Return Return [6] 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons [7] ll Search backward Search backward Search backward DVR search backward *2 DVR search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward Search forward DVR search forward *2 DVR search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward b Skip backward Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Direction back a Skip forward Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward REC/ DISC SKIP Rec (recorder) Disc skip (player) Rec Rec (recorder) DVR rec *2 DVR rec *2 Disc skip Rec Rec s Stop Stop Stop DVR stop *2 DVR stop *2 Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause Pause DVR pause *2 DVR pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Pause p Play Play Play DVR play *2 DVR play *2 Play Play Play [8] MENU Menu Menu Menu Menu [9] AUDIO Display Display Display Display Enter/recall Enter [10] DISPLAY [11] ENT Audio Audio Display Display Stop Play Preset up (A to E) Audio Enter Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button. *2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 99). *3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column. 98 En Remote control features ■ Selecting a component to be controlled You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons (1). Press A SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. SELECT Remote control code default settings ■ Controlling optional components (Option mode) “OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press A SELECT n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display window on the remote control. Note You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See page 101 to program buttons operated within this component control area. Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code TAPE — 2700 TUNER Yamaha 2607 TUNER TUNER Yamaha 2602 CD CD Yamaha 2300 CD-R CD-R Yamaha 2400 MULTI CH IN DVD Yamaha 2100 MD/TAPE MD Yamaha 2500 DVD DVD Yamaha 2100 BD/HD DVD DVD Yamaha 2100 PHONO TV — — DTV/CBL TV — — DVR DVR Yamaha 2807 VCR VCR — — V-AUX/ DOCK TUNER Yamaha 2606 ADVANCED OPERATION SELECT Input area Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. English 99 En Remote control features 1 Set the operation mode selector to C SOURCE and then press an input selector button (1), or to select the input area you want to set up. 4 Press the numeric buttons (5 ) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. AMP TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO SYSTEM MEMORY SOURCE 1 TV 2 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 DTV/CBL DVR VCR 7 6 4 MOVIE 8 V-AUX/DOCK STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 9 5 2 Press and hold L LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (e.g. L;DVD) and the name of the selected input area (e.g. DVD) appear alternately in the display window (A) on the remote control. LEARN 0 + 10 ENT Press 3 ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if setting is successful. “NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if the setting is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button (1) or , or ASELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 2 through 5. 6 Press L LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN y • You can set a remote control code of a different type of component to an input area. Press 3l / h repeatedly to change the library (component category). Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner), L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR • If you want to setup for another input area, press the input selector button (1) or , or press A SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the input area. Notes • Be sure to press and hold L LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 3 Press 3 ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window (A). Note “0000” appears in the display window (A) if no code has been set. 100 En 7 Press 6 p (play) or AV POWER to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control. POWER or AV y If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls” on page 101) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. Remote control features Programming codes from other remote controls 2 AUDIO SEL STANDBY SLEEP POWER PHONO MULTI CH IN AV CD-R POWER CD VCR BD/HD DVD TV TUNER DVR DVD POWER MD/TAPE V-AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL SELECT You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each input area. Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. Other remote control LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP SET MENU PURE DIRECT MENU 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT SYSTEM MEMORY 2 1 DTV/CBL DVR VCR 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN V-AUX/DOCK 5 7 6 4 MOVIE 8 3 STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH Set to SOURCE 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON + 10 ENT MODE – PTY SEEK – START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME TV MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT Note LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold L LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3. Set the operation mode selector to C SOURCE and then press an input selector button (1) or to select an input area. 4 Note Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to C SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to C AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control. 1 Press L LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the name of the selected input area (e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (A) on the remote control. Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. English 101 En Remote control features 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. “NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. Changing source names in the display window You can change the name of the input source that appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if you want to use a different name from the factory preset. This feature is useful when you have set an input area to control a different component. AUDIO SEL STANDBY SLEEP POWER PHONO MULTI CH IN AV CD-R POWER CD VCR BD/HD DVD TV TUNER DVR DVD POWER MD/TAPE SELECT V-AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL 1 Other remote control Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or C SOURCE and then press an input selector button (1), or to select the input area you want to rename. The name of the selected input area appears in the display window (A). AMP SOURCE TV TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 5. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press A SELECT k / n to select the component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 or AMP SOURCE TV Press L LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. 102 En 2 Press L RENAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RENAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. Remote control features 3 Press 3 k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing 3 n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. Pressing 3 k changes the characters in reverse order. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Macro programming features The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 105). ■ MACRO operations 4 Macro buttons Press 3 h to move the cursor to the next position. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON + 10 ENT MODE – PTY SEEK – START REC PRESET/CH DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME ENTER A/B/C/D/E y Press 3 l to move the cursor to the previous position. MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set the L MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON. Press 3 ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to rename another input area, press the input selector button (1) or , or press A SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5. MACRO LEARN CLEAR 2 Press the desired macro button. 3 Set the L MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF when you finish to using the macro programming operation. OFF 6 ON ADVANCED OPERATION OFF 5 MACRO ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR Press L RENAME again to exit the renaming mode. RENAME Notes Note “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. English 103 En Remote control features ■ Default macro functions Pressing macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY POWER POWER — — (*1) (*2) POWER TV POWER — — POWER TUNER — TUNER CD CD CD-R CD-R MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE MD/TAPE DVD (*3) — (CD area) (*4) (CD-R area) (*4) — (MD/TAPE area) (*4) DVD (DVD area) (*4) POWER BD/HD DVD — (*1) BD/HD DVD PHONO PHONO DTV/CBL DTV/CBL DVR DVR VCR VCR (BD/HD DVD area) (*4) — — (DVR area) (*4) (VCR area) (*4) V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK — *1 You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component. *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 99), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, Blu-ray Disc player, HD DVD player or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see page 101) or set a remote control code (see page 99) in advance. 104 En Remote control features ■ Programming macro operations You can program your own macro and use the macro programming feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window (A) if you press a button other than a macro button. 3 Notes • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. 1 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. Example: Set the input source to DVD → Activate the DVD player → Set the sleep timer Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD. Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER. Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP. Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or C SOURCE and then press L MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY 2 AMP POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR 1 3 SOURCE TV or MACRO VCR V-AUX/DOCK SELECT ADVANCED OPERATION AMP SOURCE TV Indicates the number of macro steps entered Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Flashes alternately so you can set the next step Press the L MACRO button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (e.g. “M;DVD”) and the selected component name (e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (A) on the remote control. STANDBY Note To change the selected input area, press A SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas A SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area. POWER 4 TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK Press L MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or similar object when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press more than one button simultaneously. English 105 En Remote control features Clearing configurations 3 You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names and setup remote control codes. Press and hold L CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window (A). If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. ■ Clearing function sets CLEAR 1 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or C SOURCE and then press L CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window (A). y AMP Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). SOURCE TV or Notes CLEAR • “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. • “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. AMP SOURCE TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press 3 k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area) Clears all learned functions in the respective input area. The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector button to select the input area. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions of this unit. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros. RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. 4 Press LCLEAR again to exit. ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or C SOURCE and then press an input selector button (1), or to select the input area containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. AMP SOURCE TV TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK or AMP SOURCE TV 106 En Remote control features 2 Press L LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 LEARN Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or C SOURCE and then press L MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. AMP SOURCE TV Notes MACRO or • Do not press and hold L LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 3 SOURCE TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press and hold L CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if clearing was successful. MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold L CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window (A) if clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control, release the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press L CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. AMP MODE – PTY SEEK – START LEARN CLEAR RENAME OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press A SELECT k / n to select the input area, then repeat step 3. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press L LEARN again to exit. Notes • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 2. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 3 Press L MACRO again to exit the macro programming mode. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. 107 En English • “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press more than one button simultaneously. y Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2) and third zone (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third zone using the supplied remote control. Connect the source component to the analog audio input jacks of this unit to play back the source in Zone 2 or Zone 3. This unit does not output the audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT and HDMI jacks to the ZONE OUT jacks. Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in Zone 2 and/or Zone 3. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 to the main zone (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3. y • You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit. • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. REMOTE REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT Yamaha component Yamaha component This unit REMOTE IN OUT ■ Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT jacks and select “EXT” in “AMP” (see page 91). From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 3) jacks From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks Amplifier Amplifier Analog audio signals only This unit DVD player etc. Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver MAIN ZONE 3 ZONE 2 Infrared signal emitter Main zone From the REMOTE OUT jack Second zone (Zone 2) Third zone (Zone 3) To the REMOTE IN jack To the REMOTE IN jack Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. • Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the Zone 2/Zone 3 when “VOLUME” are set to “FIX” (see page 92). 108 En Using multi-zone configuration ■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit Important safety notice The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “[SP1]” or “[SP2]” for “AMP” (see page 91). If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “BOTH” for “AMP” (see page 91). R + SP1 PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3 – – SP2 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 L + R L + R + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP – – SINGLE L + – Second zone (Zone 2) Third zone (Zone 3) Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 You can select the zone you want to control by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. ■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3 Front panel operations 1 Press P ZONE 2 ON/OFF or P ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3. 2 Press P ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. ADVANCED OPERATION This unit Each time you press P ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 ZONE3 No indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions. ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions. English 109 En Using multi-zone configuration y • You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press P ZONE CONTROLS again. • The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on. 3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 111 to perform further operations. Remote control operations 1 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press A SELECT k repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window (A) on the remote control. ■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 using the remote control 8 POWER and 7 STANDBY on the remote control work differently depending on the selected zone that appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. • When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When the all mode is selected, pressing 8 POWER turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and pressing 7 STANDBY sets them to the standby mode simultaneously. Control mode Display window (A) Name of the selected input area Turns on the main zone only or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 2 mode “ZONE 2” or “2;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 3 mode “ZONE 3” or “3;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode. “ALL” 8 POWER: turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. 7STANDBY: sets the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. Main zone mode AMP All mode SOURCE POWER and STANDBY SELECT TV Notes or 2 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 111 to perform further operations. 3 Press A SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. 110 En • When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when 8POWER or 7STANDBY is pressed. • “ALL” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control only when ASELECT n is pressed. Using multi-zone configuration Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2 or Zone 3 operation mode. ■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source of the selected zone. If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2: name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the selected input source” is displayed in the display window (A) on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively. ■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3 Press E TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BALANCE” and then rotate N PROGRAM on the front panel to adjust the balance of the front left and right speaker level of the selected zone. ■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and then press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response (BASS) respectively. • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the FM/AM tuning features in the selected zone. For details about the FM/AM tuning operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 54. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to play back the sources in the iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10 sold separately) in the selected zone. You can only control iPod in the simple remote mode (see page 61). + TV VOL – AMP SOURCE BASS TV + CH ADVANCED OPERATION Note – The input sources are shared across all zones. You cannot select the same input source in multiple zones simultaneously. TREBLE y You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press P ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again. ■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate Q VOLUME on the front panel (or press B VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the selected zone. y You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using E TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 52. Note Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window (A) of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality of the corresponding zone (see page 110). y Press D MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone. Note When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3, B VOLUME +/– can be used only when “VOLUME” is set to “VAR” in “ZONE SET” (see page 92). English 111 En Using multi-zone configuration ■ Using Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control (except Europe model) You can control Zone 2 or Zone 3 features by using the supplied Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. First, set the ID1/ID2 switch and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch appropriately. 6 STANDBY Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode. POWER 1 2 3 TUNER CD MD/TAPE DVD DTV/CBL DVR PRESET STANDBY CD-R 5 6 BD/HD DVD PHONO VCR V-AUX/DOCK VOLUME 7 MUTE 8 A/B/C/D/E Note This button is operational only when A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 7 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3. 8 MUTE Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 9 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that of Zone 3. Controlling the tuner function (see page 54) Select “TUNER” as the input source of the controlling zone to use the following functions 4 ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 9 2 PRESET k / n Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 56). 3 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 55). Controlling the amplifier function 1 Input selector buttons Selects the desired input source for the controlling zone. 4 ID1/ID2 switch Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see page 114). 5 POWER Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3. Note This button is operational only when A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 112 En Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 33). • Only A MASTER ON/OFF, O STRAIGHT and the N PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using the advanced setup menu Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. 2 Press and hold O STRAIGHT and then press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED MENU” appears in the front panel display. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SPEAKER IMP. EFFECT 3 While holding down Center The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround Surround back MASTER Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Front 6Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround 4 Press O STRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Surround back ■ Remote sensor y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. Impedance level The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front 8Ω MIN STRAIGHT Speaker ADVANCED OPERATION 1 ■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP. REMOTE SENSOR Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. Note 113 En English We recommend that you set the parameter to “ON” in most cases. Advanced setup See page 113 for the operation of the advanced setup menu. 3 Press 3 ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window(A) on the remote control. 4 Press the numeric buttons (5 ) to enter the four-digit remote control AMP ID code for the input area you want to use. ■ RS-232C access on the standby mode RS-232C STANDBY Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode. Choices: YES, NO Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES [Other models]: NO • Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. • Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. Remote control AMP ID code*1 Operates this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2002 Operates this unit using an alternative code. ID2 *1 The remote control setting. *2 The setting of this unit. 5 Setting remote control AMP ID code 1 2 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or C SOURCE. Press 3 ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window (A) if the setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window (A) if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. PRESET/CH Press and hold L LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press 3 l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP” appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. PRESET/CH RC AMP ID*2 2001 (initial setting) ■ Remote control AMP ID RC AMP ID Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2002”. Function ENTER A/B/C/D/E 6 Press L LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN ENTER LEARN A/B/C/D/E ■ Remote control TUNER ID RC TUNER ID Notes • Be sure to press and hold L LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 114 En Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2602”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2603”. Advanced setup Setting remote control TUNER ID 1 2 Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or C SOURCE and then press 1TUNER on the remote control to select the tuner to change the remote control ID. Press and hold L LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object until “L;TUN” and “TUNER” alternately appear in the display window (A). LEARN 3 seconds 4 Remote control TUNER ID code*1 Press 3 ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window (A) on the remote control. RC TUNER ID*2 Operates this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2603 Operates this unit using an alternative code. ID2 *1 The remote control setting. *2 The setting of this unit. 5 Press 3 ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window (A) if the setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window (A) if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 6 Press L LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Function 2602 (initial setting) Notes • Be sure to press and hold L LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. Press the numeric buttons (5 ) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the input area you want to use. LEARN English 115 En Advanced setup See page 113 for the operation of the advanced setup menu. ■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier function (see page 19). Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier function. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier function. Note When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-amplifier connection (see page 19). ■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. You can select the category of parameters to be initialized. Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL • Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters of the sound field parameters (see page 64). • Select “VIDEO” to initialize the parameters in “VIDEO SET” (see page 89) and “OSD SHIFT” (see page 88) and “GRAY BACK” in “DISPLAY SET” (see page 88). • Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this unit. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure. Notes • The advanced setup menu parameters are not initialized. • Use “INITIALIZE” in the sound field program menu to initialize the parameters of the desired program (see page 64). 116 En ■ HDMI video monitor check MONITOR CHECK Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check function of this unit. When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to “YES”, this unit receives the information of the available video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported by the video monitor in “HDMI SCALING” (see page 89). When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to “SKIP”, you can select nay resolution in “HDMI SCALING”. Choices: YES, SKIP TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound. Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 33 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 24-31 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 43 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while the input source component outputs digital audio signals. Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 43 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the C INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons (1) on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 16 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press D MUTE or B VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 44 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 21 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and “HDMI” audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V1800” in “SET MENU”. 85 The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source components in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit. 89 This unit outputs the video signals are not supported on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Set the “INITIALIZE” to “VIDEO” to reset the video parameters. 116 Set “MON.CHK” to “YES”. 116 Pure Direct mode is active. Turn off the Pure Direct mode. 52 42, 43 117 En English Non-standard video signals are input. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture. Cause Troubleshooting Problem Short message displays do not appear on the video monitor. Cause Remedy See page “SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”. Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”. 88 “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”. Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”. 88 “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF”. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. 89 The signals input at the HDMI input jacks are being output at the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video signals are being input. The sound suddenly goes off. Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 33, 113 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press D MUTE or B VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 44 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 16 Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER LEVEL”. Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings. 79 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”. 77 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 46 No sound is heard from the presence speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press O STRAIGHT to turn them on. 51 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 42 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”. 78 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press O STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 51 Speakers are connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND speaker terminals. 51 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 77 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 77 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 78 “SUR.B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 78 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. 118 En Troubleshooting Problem The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. (Desired input source indicator or decoder indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy See page The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 43 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 28 The volume level is low while a record is being played. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier. 28 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. A humming sound is heard. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 25, 28 Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 28 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 90 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 16 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — 119 En English The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Troubleshooting ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. See page Check the antenna connections. 32 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 54 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 54 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 55 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. 32 Use the manual tuning method. 54 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 32 Noises can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 32 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — Remedy See page There are buzzing and whining noises. ■ HDMI HDMI ERROR Cause DEVICE OVER The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP ERROR HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — HDMI MESSAGE Out of Resolution 120 En Cause The connected video monitor is not compatible with the resolution of the input video signal. Remedy Set the resolution of the video output signal of the input source component appropriately. See page — Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. The remote control does not learn new functions. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 36 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 5 The operation mode selector is set incorrectly. Set the operation mode selector correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the C AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the C SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the C TV position. — The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 99 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 99 The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 101 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 106 100, 114 101 5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 121 En Troubleshooting ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection of your iPod (see page 31). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 31 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown type The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 31 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 37 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — 122 En Troubleshooting During AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 16 E-2:NO SUR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 16 E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 16 E-4:SBR.SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 16 E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 17 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 37 E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 37 Check the speaker connections and placement. 16 E-9:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 37 E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 37 After AUTO SETUP Warning message Cause Remedy See page Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). 16 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 16 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 37 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION W-1:OUT OF PHASE Notes If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. If warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal. Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct. If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center. English • • • • 123 En RESETTING THE SYSTEM Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. 1 Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. 2 Press and hold O STRAIGHT and then press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP” appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT 3 MASTER INITIALIZE CANCEL Press O STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “ALL”. INITIALIZE ALL y • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. • You can initialize the video parameters or sound field program parameters separately. See page 116 for details. While holding down Rotate the N PROGRAM selector to select “INITIALIZE”. 124 En 4 5 Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. GLOSSARY Glossary ■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. ■ Bi-amplification connection A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. ■ Component video signal ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. ■ Dialogue normalization Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so that the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS programs. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Deep Color ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. English 125 En Glossary ■ Dolby Digital Plus ■ Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/ amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. 126 En ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with fullquality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. Glossary ■ DTS Digital Surround ■ DTS-HD Master Audio DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers of the future, DTSHD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ DTS Express DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio feature of Bluray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are mixed down with the main audio stream on the player component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or analog connections. ■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a highdefinition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ HDMI ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. English 127 En Glossary ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. 128 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION Sound field program information ■ Elements of a sound field ■ SILENT CINEMA What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital audio systems. Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. ■ Sound output from each speaker Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. For details about the sound output from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to “Sound output in each sound field program” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual. Note Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP y Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speakers (see page 46). English 129 En PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION Parametric equalizer information This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 130 En Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 160/195/255/335 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 175 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 180 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ...................................................................................... 0.9 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 130 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to OUT (REC) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .............................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more • Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Format (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL • Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) .................................................................................... 60 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf) • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB • Frequency Response Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m 131 En English • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz Specifications GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General and Asia models] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum) [U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum) [Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm (17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 17-1/4 in) • Weight ........................................................... 17.0 kg (37 lbs. 8 oz.) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 132 En Index ■ Numerics ■ A ■ B B)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu ...............83 B)SP LEVEL, Basic menu ...................79 BASIC MENU, Manual setup ..............77 Basic menu, Manual setup ...................72 Bass cross over, Speaker settings .........78 Battery charge indicator .......................34 BI-AMP, Advanced setup ..................116 Bi-amplifier setting, Advanced setup ..............................116 Blu-ray Disc player connection ............25 ■ C C)DYNAMIC RANGE, Sound menu .....................................83 C)MEMORY GUARD, Option menu .....................................90 C)SP DISTANCE, Basic menu ............80 C.IMAGE, Decoder parameter ............71 Cable plugs ...........................................20 CD player connection ...........................28 CD recorder connection .......................28 Cellar Club, Sound field programs .......................48 CENTER PRE OUT jack connection ........................................29 CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............77 Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........77 CENTER WIDTH, Decoder parameter ...........................71 Chamber, Sound field programs ..........47 Charge on standby, Dock set ................87 Church in Freiburg, sound field programs ........................47 CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 35 CLASSICAL, Sound field programs ...................... 47 CLASSICS, Radio Data System program type ................................... 59 Clock time, Radio Data System information ...................................... 58 COMPONENT I/P, Display settings ............................... 89 Component interlace/progressive upconversion, Display settings ............ 89 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .............. 20 Compressed Music Enhancer .............. 50 Connection, AM antenna ..................... 32 Connection, Audio components .......... 28 Connection, Blu-ray Disc player ......... 25 Connection, CD player ........................ 28 Connection, CD recorder ..................... 28 Connection, CENTER PRE OUT jack ................ 29 Connection, DVD player ..................... 26 Connection, DVD recorder .................. 27 Connection, External amplifier ........... 29 Connection, External decoder ............. 30 Connection, FM antenna ..................... 32 Connection, FRONT PRE OUT jack ................... 29 Connection, HD DVD player .............. 25 Connection, iPod ................................. 31 Connection, MD recorder .................... 28 Connection, Multi-format player ......... 30 Connection, Power cable ..................... 32 Connection, projector .......................... 24 Connection, PVR ................................. 27 Connection, Set-top box ...................... 27 Connection, SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ....... 29 Connection, SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jack ................................. 29 Connection, SURROUND PRE OUT jack .......... 29 Connection, turntable .......................... 28 Connection, TV monitor ...................... 24 Connection, VCR ................................ 27 CROSS OVER, Speaker settings ........ 78 CT, Radio Data System information ...................................... 58 CULTURE, Radio Data System program type ................................... 59 ■ D D)INIT. CONFIG ................................ 91 D)LIPSYNC, Sound menu .................. 84 D)TEST TONE, Basic menu ............... 80 Decoder descriptions ........................... 70 Decoder indicators ............................... 35 DECODER MODE, Initial configuration ......................... 91 Decoder mode, Initial configuration ......................... 91 133 En English A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 88 A)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............. 82 A)SPEAKER SET, Basic menu ........... 77 AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 32 Action Game, Sound field programs ....................... 48 Advanced setup .................................. 113 Advanced sound configurations ........... 64 Adventure, Sound field programs ........ 50 AFFAIRS, Radio Data System program type .................................... 59 AM antenna connection ....................... 32 AM tuning ............................................ 54 AMP, Operation mode selector ........... 36 Audio and video synchronization, Sound menu .....................................84 Audio cable plugs .................................20 Audio components connection .............28 Audio information ................................44 Audio input jacks selection ..................43 AUDIO jacks ........................................20 Audio jacks ...........................................20 AUDIO SELECT .................................43 AUDIO SELECT, Initial configuration .........................91 Audio select, Initial configuration ........91 Audio settings, Sound menu ................84 Audio signal flow .................................23 AUTO DELAY, Lip sync ....................84 Auto delay, Lip sync ............................84 AUTO indicator ...................................35 AUTO SETUP .....................................37 AUTO setup .........................................72 Auto setup ............................................72 Automatic preset tuning, FM/AM tuning .................................55 Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning .......54 Available decoders with sound field programs ..........................................71 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 BASIC MENU, Manual setup .......... 72 2 VOLUME MENU, Manual setup ..... 73 2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 50 2ch Stereo DIRECT, Sound field parameter ...................... 69 2ch Stereo, Sound field programs ........ 50 2-channel stereo direct, Sound field parameter ......................................... 69 3 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 74 3 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 73 4 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 74 7ch Enhancer EFFECT LEVEL .......... 69 7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 50 7ch Stereo CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................................... 69 7ch Stereo PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................................... 69 7ch Stereo PR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................................... 69 7ch Stereo SB LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................................... 69 7ch Stereo SL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................................... 69 7ch Stereo SR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................................... 69 7ch Stereo, Sound field programs ........ 50 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level, Sound field parameter ...................... 69 7-channel stereo center speaker level, Sound field parameter ...................... 69 7-channel stereo presence left speaker level, Sound field parameter ............ 69 7-channel stereo presence right speaker level, Sound field parameter ............ 69 7-channel stereo surround back speaker level, Sound field parameter ............ 69 7-channel stereo surround left speaker level, Sound field parameter ............ 69 7-channel stereo surround right speaker level, Sound field parameter ............ 69 96/24 indicator ..................................... 34 Index DECODER MODE, Input menu ......... 86 Decoder mode, Input menu .................. 86 DIALG.LIFT, Sound field parameter ...................... 65 DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 20 DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 20 DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ...... 71 DIMMER, Display settings ................. 88 Dimmer, Display settings .................... 88 Display settings, Option menu ............. 88 DIST, Auto setup parameter ................ 38 DRAMA, Radio Data System program type .................................................. 59 Drama, Sound field programs .............. 50 DSP indicators ..................................... 35 DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter ... 65 DVD player connection ....................... 26 DVD recorder connection .................... 27 Dynamic range, Sound menu ............... 83 ■ E E)AUDIO SET, Sound menu ............... 84 E)ZONE SET, Option menu ................ 91 EDUCATE, Radio Data System program type .................................................. 59 Effect sound level, Sound field parameter ...................... 65 Enhanced other networks data service, Radio Data System tuning ............... 60 ENHANCER indicator ........................ 35 ENTERTAINMENT, Sound field programs .......................................... 48 EON data service, Radio Data System tuning ............................................... 60 EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............ 82 EQ, Auto setup parameter .................... 40 Equalizer type select, Equalizer ........... 82 Equalizer, Sound menu ........................ 82 EXTD SUR., Initial configuration ....... 91 EXTD SUR., Sound menu ................... 84 Extended surround, Initial configuration ......................... 91 Extended Surround, Sound menu ........ 84 External amplifier connection .............. 29 External decoder connection ................ 30 ■ F F)HDMI SET, Sound menu ................. 85 FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 89 FM antenna connection ........................ 32 FM tuning ............................................ 54 Front input, Multi channel input Setup ............... 87 Front panel display scroll, Display settings ............................... 89 Front panel door ................................... 36 FRONT PRE OUT connection ............ 29 FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 77 Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 77 FRONT, Multi channel input Setup ..... 87 ■ G GEQ, Equalizer .................................... 82 Graphic equalizer, Equalizer ................ 82 134 En GRAY BACK, Display settings ........... 88 Gray back, Display settings ................. 88 ■ ■ ■ H Hall in Amsterdam, Sound field programs .......................47 Hall in Munich, Sound field programs .......................47 Hall in Vienna, Sound field programs .......................47 HD DVD player connection ................. 25 HDMI ...................................................21 HDMI ASPECT ...................................90 HDMI aspect ratio ................................90 HDMI AUTO, Lip sync .......................84 HDMI auto, Lip sync ...........................84 HDMI indicator .................................... 34 HDMI set, Sound menu .......................85 HDMI video monitor, Advanced setup ..............................116 HEADPHONE, Dynamic range ........... 83 HEADPHONE, Low frequency effect level .............. 83 Headphones ..........................................43 Headphones indicator ...........................35 Headphones using ................................43 Headphones, Dynamic range ...............83 Headphones, Low frequency effect level .............. 83 HiFi DSP indicator ...............................35 ■ I I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu .........86 INFO, Radio Data System program type .................................... 59 Infrared window ...................................36 INI.VOL., Audio settings .....................81 INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......66 Initial configuration, Option menu .......91 Initial delay, Sound field parameter ......................66 Initial volume, Audio settings .............. 81 INITIALIZE, Advanced setup ...........116 INPUT CH, Multi channel input Setup .......................................87 Input channel and speaker indicators ......................34 Input channel indicators .......................34 Input channels, Multi channel input Setup ................87 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .............85 Input menu, Manual setup ....................74 INPUT RENAME, Input menu ............86 Input rename, Input menu ....................86 Input signal indicators ..........................35 Input source indicators .........................34 Input sources information display ........44 Input/output assignment, Input menu .......................................86 iPod connection .................................... 31 iPod controlling .................................... 61 iPod using .............................................61 J Jacks .....................................................20 L LEVEL, Auto setup parameter .............40 LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......77 LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............77 LIGHT M, Radio Data System program type ....................................59 Lip Sync, Sound menu .........................84 LIVE/CLUB, Sound field programs .......................47 LIVENESS, Sound field parameter ......................67 Liveness, Sound field parameter ..........67 Low-frequency effect level, Sound menu ......................................83 LVL, Auto setup parameter ..................38 ■ M M.O.R. M, Radio Data System program type ....................................59 Macro programming, remote control ................................105 MANUAL DELAY, Lip sync ..............84 Manual delay, Lip sync ........................84 Manual preset tuning, FM/AM tuning .................................55 MANUAL SETUP ...............................72 Manual setup ........................................72 Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............54 MASTER ON/OFF ...............................33 MAX VOL., Audio settings .................81 Maximum volume ................................81 Maximum volume, Audio settings .......81 MD recorder connection .......................28 Memory guard, Option menu ...............90 MEMORY indicator .............................35 MON.CHK, Advanced setup ..............116 Mono Movie, Sound field programs .......................50 MOVIE, Sound field programs ............49 MULTI CH INPUT component selection .........................43 MULTI CH INPUT jacks .....................30 Multi-format player connection ............30 Multi-channel source playback in 2-channel stereo ...........................53 Multi-channel sources playback with headphones .......................................51 Multi-information display ....................34 MULTI-ZONE configuration, Zone2, Zone3 .................................108 MUSIC ENHANCER, Sound field category ............................................50 Music Video, Sound field programs .......................49 MUTE ...................................................44 MUTE indicator ...................................34 Muting ..................................................44 ■ N Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type .........70, 71 Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ..................70 Index NEWS, Radio Data System program type .................................... 59 Number of speakers, Auto setup parameter ....................... 38 ■ O ON SCREEN, Display settings ............ 88 On-screen display time, Display settings ................................ 88 Operation mode selector ...................... 36 OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 37 Optimizer microphone ......................... 37 OPTION MENU, Manual setup .......... 88 Option menu, Manual setup ................. 74 OSD SHIFT, Display settings .............. 88 OSD shift, Display settings .................. 88 Other components controlling by Remote control ........................... 98 Other components controlling, Remote control ................................ 98 OTHER M, Radio Data System program type .................................... 59 ■ P ■ R Radio Data System tuning ....................58 Radio text, Radio Data System information .......................................58 RC AMP ID, Advanced setup ............114 RC TUNER ID, Advanced setup .......114 Recital/Opera, Sound field programs .......................49 Remote control AMP ID, Advanced setup ..............................114 Remote control code default settings .................................99 Remote control codes settings ..............99 Remote control TUNER ID, Advanced setup ..............................114 Remote control using ...........................36 REMOTE IN jack ................................31 REMOTE OUT jack ............................31 REMOTE SENSOR, Advanced setup ..............................113 Remote sensor, Advanced setup ........113 Repeat, iPod playback ..........................62 Resetting the system ...........................124 REV.DELAY, Sound field parameter ......................68 REV.LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................68 REV.TIME, Sound field parameter ......................68 Reverberation delay, Sound field parameter ..........................................68 Reverberation level, Sound field parameter ..........................................68 Reverberation time, Sound field parameter ......................68 ROCK M, Radio Data System program type ...................................................59 Roleplaying Game, Sound field programs .......................48 ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ......................67 Room size, Sound field parameter .......67 RS-232C STANDBY, Advanced setup ..............................114 RT, Radio Data System information .......................................58 ■ S 135 En English S VIDEO jacks .....................................20 S.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter ......................66 S.LIVENESS, Sound field parameter ......................67 S.ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ..................... 67 SB INI.DLY, Sound field parameter ..................... 66 SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ............... 78 SB LIVENESS, Sound field parameter ..................... 67 SB ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ..................... 67 SCIENCE, Radio Data System program type .................................................. 59 Sci-Fi, Sound field programs ............... 49 Selection, Audio input jacks ................ 43 Selection, MULTI CH INPUT component ...... 43 Selection, Radio Data System program type ................................... 59 SET MENU usage ............................... 76 Set-top box connection ........................ 27 Short message display, Display settings ............................... 88 SHORT MESSAGE, Display settings ............................... 88 Shuffle iPod playback .......................... 62 SIGNAL INFO .................................... 44 Signal information ............................... 75 SILENT CINEMA ............................... 51 SILENT CINEMA indicator ............... 35 SLEEP indicator .................................. 35 Sleep timer ........................................... 45 Sound field indicators .......................... 35 Sound field parameter changing .......... 64 Sound field programs .......................... 46 Sound field programs selection ........... 46 Sound field programs with headphones .............................. 51 Sound field programs without surround speakers ........................................... 51 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........... 82 Sound menu, Manual setup ................. 73 SOURCE, Operation mode selector .................. 36 SP, Auto setup parameter .................... 38 Speaker distance, Auto setup parameter ...................... 38 Speaker distance, Basic menu ............. 80 Speaker distances ................................. 80 SPEAKER IMP., Advanced setup ............................. 113 Speaker impedance setting .................. 33 Speaker impedance, Advanced setup ............................. 113 Speaker level adjusting ........................ 53 Speaker level, Auto setup parameter ...................... 38 Speaker level, Basic menu ................... 79 Speaker settings, Basic menu .............. 77 SPEAKER, Dynamic range ................. 83 SPEAKER, Low frequency effect level ....................................... 83 Speakers, Dynamic range .................... 83 Speakers, Low frequency effect level ....................................... 83 Specifications .................................... 131 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter ...................... 66 P.ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ...................... 67 PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ...... 71 Parameter initialization, Advanced setup .............................. 116 Parametric equalizer information ....... 130 Parametric equalizer type, Auto setup parameter ....................... 40 PHONES jack ...................................... 43 PL II Game, Decoder type ................... 70 PL II Movie, Decoder type .................. 70 PL II Music, Decoder type ................... 70 Playback basic procedure ..................... 42 PLIIx Game, Decoder type .................. 70 PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ........... 70, 71 PLIIx Music, Decoder type .................. 70 POP M, Radio Data System program type .................................... 59 Power cable connection ....................... 32 Presence initial delay, Sound field parameter ......................................... 66 Presence room size, Sound field parameter ...................... 67 PRESENCE SP, Speaker settings ........ 78 Presence speaker indicators ................. 34 Presence speakers, Speaker settings .... 78 Presence/Surround back channel priority, Speaker settings ............................... 79 Preset stations exchange, FM/AM tuning ................................. 57 Preset stations selection ....................... 56 PRIORITY, Speaker settings ............... 79 PRO LOGIC, Decoder type ................. 70 Program service, Radio Data System information ...................................... 58 Program type, Radio Data System information ...................................... 58 Projector connection ............................ 24 PS, Radio Data System information .......................................58 PTY SEEK mode, Radio Data System tuning ...............................................59 PTY, Radio Data System information .......................................58 PURE DIRECT ....................................52 Pure hi-fi sound ....................................52 PVR connection ...................................27 Index Spectacle, Sound field programs ......... 49 SPORT, Radio Data System program type .................................... 59 Sports, Sound field programs ............... 48 Standard, Sound field programs ........... 49 STANDBY CHARGE, Dock set ......... 87 Standby mode, Main zone ................... 33 Standby mode, Zone2, Zone3 ............ 110 STEREO indicator ............................... 35 STEREO, Sound field programs .......... 50 STRAIGHT .......................................... 51 Straight Compressed Music Enhancer effect level, Sound field parameter ...................... 69 Straight Enhancer EFFECT LEVEL .... 69 STRAIGHT mode ................................ 51 SUBWOOFER PHASE, Speaker settings ............................... 79 Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ...... 79 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack connection ........................................ 29 Supplied accessories .............................. 4 SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI set ............ 85 Support audio, HDMI set ..................... 85 SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............ 78 SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jack connection ....................... 29 Surround back initial delay, Sound field parameter ...................... 66 Surround back liveness, Sound field parameter ...................... 67 Surround back room size, Sound field parameter ...................... 67 SURROUND DECODE, Decoder category ............................. 70 Surround initial delay, Sound field parameter ...................... 66 Surround left/right back speakers, Speaker settings ............................... 78 Surround left/right speakers, Speaker settings ............................... 78 Surround liveness, Sound field parameter ...................... 67 SURROUND PRE OUT jack connection ........................................ 29 Surround room size, Sound field parameter ...................... 67 System memory ................................... 75 ■ T Test tone, Basic menu .......................... 80 Test tone, Equalizer ............................. 82 TEST, Equalizer ................................... 82 The Bottom Line, Sound field programs ...................... 48 The Roxy Theatre, Sound field programs ...................... 48 Tonal quality adjusting ........................ 52 TONE BYPASS, Audio settings ......... 84 Tone bypass, Audio settings ................ 84 Transmit indicator ................................ 36 Troubleshooting ................................. 117 TUNED indicator ................................. 35 136 En Tuner frequency step, Advanced setup ..............................116 TUNER FRQ STEP, Advanced setup ..............................116 Tuner indicators ...................................35 Turning off ...........................................33 Turning on ............................................33 Turntable connection ............................28 TV controlling by Remote control .......97 TV controlling, Remote control ........... 97 TV monitor connection ........................24 TV, Operation mode selector ...............36 ■ U UNIT, Speaker distance .......................80 Unit, Speaker distance ..........................80 Unprocessed input sources ...................51 ■ V VARIED, Radio Data System program type .................................... 59 VCR connection ...................................27 Vertical dialogue position, Sound field parameter ......................65 VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 31 Video cable plugs ................................. 20 VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........89 Video conversion, Display settings ......89 Video information ................................44 VIDEO jacks ........................................20 Video jacks ...........................................20 Video signal flow ................................. 23 Video sources in the background .........45 Village Vanguard, Sound field programs .......................47 Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................51 VIRTUAL indicator .............................35 VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................ 5 VOLUME level indicator .....................34 Volume level, Auto setup parameter .......................40 Volume menu, Manual setup ...............73 VOLUME TRIM, Input menu .............86 Volume Trim, Input menu ...................86 ■ W Wake on RS-232C access, Advanced setup ..............................114 Warehouse Loft, Sound field programs .......................47 ■ Y YPAO indicator .................................... 35 ■ Z Zone set, Option menu .........................91 ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators ..................35 “A MASTER ON/OFF” or “1 DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident). The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair. Conditions 1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the product may be returned at the customer’s expense. 2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland. 3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha. 4. The following are excluded from this guarantee: a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear. b. Damage resulting from: (1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party. (2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair. (3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in the country where it is used. (4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control. (5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products. (6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland. (7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products. (Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.) 5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply. 6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the product. 7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data. 8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase contract. English 137 En ■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/ Фронтальная панель A B C M PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE SLEEP EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER Q D E F G H I J K L AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE SLEEP EDIT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM N i OPTIMIZER MIC O SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX P ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/ Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ O P 1 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE TV MUTE 2 LEVEL PRESET/CH MENU BAND SRCH MODE 3 8 9 0 A B C TV D SET MENU TITLE 7 PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER E F G M A/B/C/D/E 4 PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT SYSTEM MEMORY 2 1 3 H I SYSTEM MEMORY 2 1 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 7 6 MOVIE 5 6 7 MOVIE 8 8 STEREO ENHANCER STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON + 10 ENT MODE – PTY SEEK – START J K 0 9 APPENDIX 6 4 4 N REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME L ii Sound output in each sound field program Son émis dans chaque correction de champ sonore Klangausgabe in jedem soundfeldprogramm Ljudutmatning för varje ljudfältsprogram Geluidsweergave in elk van de geluidsveldprogramma’s Воспроизведение звучания для каждой программы звукового поля L Front left speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker C Center speaker SR Surround right speaker PL Presence left speaker R Front right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PR Presence right speaker Speaker from which no sound is being output Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker settings 7-channel PL L Speaker settings 5-channel PL PR C R L C R L 5-channel PR C R L SR SL C R 5 1 SL SBL SBR PL L SR SL SL SR R SBL SBR PL PR C L C L R SR PR C R L SR SL C R 6 2 SL SBL SBR PL L SR SL SL SR R SBL SBR PL PR C L C L R SR PR C R L SR SL C R 7 3 SL SBL SBR PL L SR SL SL SR R SBL SBR PL PR C L C L R SR PR C R L SR SL C R 8 4 SL iii 7-channel SBL SBR SR SL SR SL SBL SBR SR *1 EX / PL x / : OFF *2 EX / PL x / : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input. Input audio source Program PRIORITY 2-channel (monaural) 2-channel (stereo) 5.1-channel*1 6.1/7.1-channel*2 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 4 3 2 2 4 7 4 2 4 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich Hall in Vienna Hall in Amsterdam Church in Freiburg Chamber LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard Warehouse Loft Cellar Club The Roxy Theatre The Bottom Line PRNS ENTERTAINMENT Sports Music Video Recital/Opera Action Game Roleplaying Game MOVIE STANDARD Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure Drama PRNS MOVIE Mono Movie PRNS 3 2 2 4 SB 3 2 2 4 STEREO 2ch Stereo PRNS/SB 5 5 5 5 STEREO 7ch Stereo MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer PRNS/SB 4 4 4 4 SUR.DECODE Sur. Decode (Pro Logic) (PLII Movie) (PLII Game) PRNS/SB 6 7 7 4 SUR.DECODE Sur. Decode (PLII Music) PRNS/SB 8 7 7 4 SUR.DECODE Sur. Decode (PLIIx Movie) (PLIIx Game) (Neo:6 Cinema) PRNS/SB 6 4 7 4 SUR.DECODE Sur. Decode (PLIIx Music) (Neo:6 Music) PRNS/SB 8 4 7 4 STRAIGHT Pure Direct MUSIC ENHANCER Straight Enhancer PRNS/SB 5 5 7 4 SB SB APPENDIX iv List of remote control codes Liste des codes de commande Liste der Fernbedienungscodes Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes Список кодов дистанционного управления CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 v AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY TECHNICS THORENS THULE UNIVERSUM VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 0059 0056 0184 0184 0184 0099 0184 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS 0678 LG 0768 LIMIT 0795 MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702 MARANTZ 0566 MEMOREX 0858 MICO 0750 MICROSOFT 0549 MINTEK 0744 MITSUBISHI 0548 MUSTEK 0757 NESA 0744 ONKYO ORITRON PALSONIC PANASONIC PHILIPS 0530 0678 0699 0517, 0659, 1389 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 HD DVD PLAYER TOSHIBA 2103 DVD RECORDER PANASONIC PHILIPS SHARP SONY YAMAHA 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2812, 2813 2809, 2810, 2811 2807 Blu-lay Disc player PANASONIC SAMSUNG 2800, 2801, 2802 2816 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 YAMAHA 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 THORENS UHER VENTURER VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 1216 0558 1417 0101 0041, 0185 0203, 1203, 1358, 2601 (TUNER ID1) 2602 (TUNER ID2) 2603 (iPod) 2606 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 1327 ABSAT 0150 ALBA 0482 ALPHASTAR 0799 AMSTRAD 0874 ASTON 0169, 1156 ASTRO 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 TAPE DECK AIWA CARVER GRUNDIG 0056 0056 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 vi APPENDIX 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH 1127 PACE 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 CONTEC 0036, 0207 CRAIG 0207 CROSLEY 0081 CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 vii GEC GATEWAY GELOSO GENEXXA GIBRALTER GOLDSTAR 0064, 0543 1782, 1783 0036 0190 0044, 0057 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2903, 2904 (projector) YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE 0099 CINERAL 0305 CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305 COLT 0099 COMBITECH 0379 CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD 0068, 0094 KODAK 0062, 0064 KOLIN 0068, 0070 KORPEL 0099 LG 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 viii APPENDIX 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 ix SUNSTAR SUNTRONIC SYLVANIA 0027 0027 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 RX-V1800_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 6:13 PM G RX-V1800 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WK69330 RX-V1800 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ A ON OFF MASTER ON/OFF MAIN ZONE B INPUT C N AUDIO SELECT PROGRAM TONE CONTROL D E O OPTIMIZER MIC YPAO EFFECT STRAIGHT A/B/C/D/E F PHONES SILENT CINEMA EDIT P VIDEO L R ZONE 3 AUDIO ZONE 2 TUNING MODE OPTICAL ZONE CONTROLS MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE ON/OFF FM/AM VIDEO AUX PRESET/ TUNING H I J K MULTI ZONE S VIDEO PRESET/TUNING G SLEEP L Q M GE RX-V1800 VOLUME PURE DIRECT ■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель/Pannello anteriore/ Panel delantero The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung. Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen. De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing. Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации. I manuali e le lettere dell’alfabeto corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni. Los números y las letras en el interior de círculos se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones. 00_sheet_RX-V1800_GE.book Page 1 Friday, June 15, 2007 9:29 PM 00_sheet_RX-V1800_GE.book Page i Friday, June 15, 2007 9:29 PM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/ Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ/Telecomando/Mando a distancia O P 1 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD CD-R MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE DVD BD/HD DVD PHONO DTV/CBL DVR VCR V-AUX/DOCK SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE 2 LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH MENU SRCH MODE 3 A B C D MUTE TITLE 8 9 0 TV SET MENU BAND 7 PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER E F G M A/B/C/D/E 4 PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT SYSTEM MEMORY 2 1 3 H I SYSTEM MEMORY 2 1 3 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 7 6 MOVIE 5 6 7 MOVIE 8 8 STEREO ENHANCER STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 6 4 4 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON + 10 ENT MODE – PTY SEEK – START J K 0 9 N REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME L Printed in Malaysia WK69410